JP2018038691A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having improved taste.SOLUTION: In a case where it is scheduled to change in future, if a current display mode is same and if the current stock number is large, it is easily determined to execute a false operation performance A at a higher probability than that of a case where the current stock number is small. If the stock number of an operation performance B is large, a player expects that the operation performance is further executed and the expectation degree is improved, excluding a case where the expectation degree is changed to the highest "rainbow" due to the stock number. Accordingly, as the stock number (the number of notification performances) of the current operation performance B increases more, a game machine improves execution frequency of the false operation performance A (suggestion performance) so as to increase the player's sense of expectation, thereby improving the taste of the game. Further, the game machine includes output means that outputs a specific signal for driving an electric component according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means so as to improve noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction, while suppressing radio emission from a substrate.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 24

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  In a gaming machine capable of executing a pre-reading effect to be noticed by changing the hold display corresponding to the variable display to a display form other than the normal form and displaying it, the display form of the hold display of the hold display to be notified is changed to a special form. There has been proposed a gaming machine that changes to a display mode with a high one-stage expectation for each shift timing (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-61580

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, when the display mode of the hold display is changed to the special mode, the stage that finally changes from the remaining number of shifts is known. The production became monotonous and the improvement of interest was insufficient.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with improved interest.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Corresponding display means (for example, first hold display portion 5HL, second hold display portion 5HR, active display portion AHA) capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in any of a plurality of display modes having different expectations.
Notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect that continuously notifies over a predetermined period that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level (for example, effect control for executing the processes of steps S604, S606, and S702) CPU 120),
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S605 and S704) for executing an suggestion effect that suggests that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level;
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving the electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals) Luminous body driver 90411, motor driving driver 90412, and luminous body drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
The other output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the control signals are the same. Transmitted sequentially between the light emitter drivers on the light emitter control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high) and low. Slew rate output state),
The suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate when the notification effect is being executed than when the notification effect is not being executed (for example, in the process of step S605, the determination shown in FIG. 24). (Determining whether or not the action effect A gaze is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the expectation can be suitably improved by the suggestion effect, and the interest is improved. In addition, the noise tolerance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased.

(2) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Corresponding display means (for example, first hold display portion 5HL, second hold display portion 5HR, active display portion AHA) capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in any of a plurality of display modes having different expectations.
Notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect that continuously notifies over a predetermined period that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level (for example, effect control for executing the processes of steps S604, S606, and S702) CPU 120),
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S605 and S704) for executing an suggestion effect that suggests that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level;
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving the electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals) Luminous body driver 90411, motor driving driver 90412, and luminous body drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
The other output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided and a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable, a wire harness) (for example, in FIG. 46 (2)). As shown, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F with different control signals. Transmitted sequentially),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 54, in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the S terminal is L (low). Set to the normal slew rate output state),
The suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate when the notification effect is being executed than when the notification effect is not being executed (for example, in the process of step S605, the determination shown in FIG. 24). (Determining whether or not the action effect A gaze is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the expectation can be suitably improved by the suggestion effect, and the interest is improved. In addition, the noise tolerance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
A plurality of notification effects may be executed in correspondence with one correspondence display (for example, FIG. 27F).
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
Corresponding display may be changed in a plurality of stages in correspondence with one notification effect.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
After the notification effect that notifies that the corresponding display changes to the highest display mode is executed, execution of the suggestion effect is limited (as shown in FIG. 24, the current display mode is “rainbow”). In this case, the action effect A gasase may not be executed).
According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be prevented.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
A predetermined effect determining means for determining the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S801 and S802);
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a hold notice effect);
With
The predetermined effect determining means includes
It is possible to determine to change the production mode at a plurality of change timings including at least the first timing and the second timing,
After determining the production mode and the final production mode when starting the predetermined production, the change mode of the production mode is determined based on the determined production mode and the final production mode at the start (step S801). After determining the display mode at the time of winning the corresponding display and the final display mode at step S802, based on the level difference from the final display mode, the number of change stages in each hold display number is determined). Good.
According to such a configuration, compression of data capacity can be reduced.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
A first effect device (for example, the sub display device 5S) and a second effect device (for example, the image display device 5);
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that can change the display mode of the corresponding display (for example, a hold notice effect),
The change effect execution means includes a first change effect that can change the display mode of the corresponding display using the first effect device (for example, the effect effect A of the modified example, see FIG. 29), the first effect device, and the The second change effect (for example, the effect effect B of the modified example, see FIG. 30) that can change the display mode of the corresponding display by the mode linked to the second effect device can be executed.
The degree of expectation may be different depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the display mode of the corresponding display changes.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of changing effects by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of changing effects.

  Further, modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions according to the following means 8 to 15. Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is awarded to the player. There is something configured to give to. Furthermore, variable display means capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means becomes a specific display result, a predetermined game value Is configured to give to the player (so-called pachinko machine). In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display device by operating the start lever, and the player By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. In accordance with the display result derived when the game is stopped, a winning occurs, a predetermined game medium determined in advance according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a player is given a predetermined gaming value as a gaming state. There is one that is configured to be in a state to be given to (so-called slot machine). The winning value means that a winning ball is paid out or a score or a prize is given in accordance with the winning of a game ball in the winning area. In addition, the game value means that when a specific display result is obtained, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes an advantageous state for a player who is easy to win, and for the player. For example, a right to be advantageous can be generated, and a condition for paying out a winning ball can be easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of a special symbol (identification information) that is started by variable display means based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. In this case, a “big hit (favorable state)” occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as “round”.

  Some such gaming machines are configured such that the signal waveform rises gently in order to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate. For example, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117505 (particularly, paragraphs 0071 and 0096, FIG. 6), a signal processing unit (output unit) has a waveform in which a signal rises more slowly than a rectangular waveform. A gaming machine that can suppress the occurrence of radio interference by deforming and outputting a rectangular wave is known.

  According to such a gaming machine, radio wave radiation can be suppressed by causing the waveform of the signal output from the output means to rise gently. However, if the waveform of the control signal rises gently uniformly, the resistance to noise from the outside of the board where the output means is provided is insufficient, and the control signal has sufficient noise resistance to prevent malfunction. There is a possibility that it cannot be increased. In view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can enhance noise resistance of a control signal for preventing malfunction.

(8) In order to achieve the above object, another aspect of the gaming machine is:
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
Other output means are provided on the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the same control signal is emitted. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high) and low. Slew rate output state).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

(9) In order to achieve the above object, another aspect of the gaming machine is:
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board provided with the output means via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable, a wire harness) (for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (2)). As described above, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and sequentially between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F with different control signals. Transmitted),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 54, in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the S terminal is L (low). And is set to a normal slew rate output state).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

(10) In the gaming machine of (8) or (9) above,
The output means outputs a specific signal (for example, each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23) from a specific signal output unit (for example, each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped into a plurality of different groups by a parallel communication method. , Output signals from Q0 to Q11) (for example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, as shown in FIG. 51, each group is grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels. In the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, each group is divided into 3 groups of 4 channels.), The output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (for example, As shown in FIG. 51, output signals from driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11 are output. Timing may be configured to be distributed are) as each group.
According to such a configuration, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be further suppressed.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above,
A drive unit (for example, operation motors 9060A to 9060C) that includes a movable member (for example, movable members 9051 to 9054) that performs the operation and operates the movable member is output from a specific signal output unit of the same group of the output unit. Driven on the basis of a specific signal (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, signals input to the same operation motor are connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group). Also good.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

(12) In any of the gaming machines (8) to (11) above,
The output means has a stop function (for example, a time-out function) for stopping the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the control signal was input (for example, the T terminal is set to H (high)). By setting, the timeout function is set to an effective state (see FIG. 48).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an operation failure due to a wiring failure or the like, and to control the electrical component stably.

(13) In the gaming machine of (12) above,
Control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal (for example, the production control microcomputer 90120 repeats at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example) in the production control process (see step S9065)). By outputting the control signal, the lighting control of the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c is continuously executed, or the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. The control may be performed such that the drive control is continuously executed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control corresponding to the stop function of the output means.

(14) In the gaming machine of (12) or (13) above,
The output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (for example, by setting the T terminal to L (low), the timeout function is set to an invalid state, and the T terminal is set to H (high)). Thus, the time-out function is set to the valid state (see FIG. 48).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce costs by sharing parts.

(15) In any one of the above gaming machines (8) to (14),
The control means is provided on a first substrate (for example, an effect control substrate 9012),
A movable member (for example, movable members 9051 to 9054) that performs the operation,
The control means includes
When a first substrate and a second substrate different from the first substrate are connected, based on a signal from detection means (for example, a movable member position sensor 9061) that can detect the state of the movable member. The abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed (see, for example, steps S9058 to S9060 of the production control main process),
When the first board and the second board (for example, the production control relay board 9016A) are in an unconnected state, control is performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable member (for example, the production control main process). (See step S9057 and the like).
According to such a configuration, the work efficiency in the manufacturing stage and the development stage can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the present embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows examples, such as various control boards mounted in the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing an example of main production control commands. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a figure which shows random number values MR1-3. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table and a jackpot classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern determination table according to a variable display result. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the command buffer at the time of a start winning prize. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the effect control command received by the effect control board side, and the processing content performed in a command analysis process according to the received effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding display setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the list | wrist of a corresponding | compatible display change pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a corresponding | compatible display change pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the list of effect production patterns. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect production | presentation setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination ratio in an effect production setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination ratio in an effect production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect production execution process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image in case a holding notice effect and an effect effect are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image in case a holding notice effect and an effect effect are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image in the case of the holding notice effect and the effect effect in a modification being performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image in the case of the holding notice effect and the effect effect in a modification being performed. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect effect in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change pattern determination process in a modification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the time of winning and the final display mode determination table in a modification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the change stage number determination table in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect production | generation setting process in a modification. It is a front view of an example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the case where a several movable member will be in the advance state. It is a figure which shows the operation example of an effect movable mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various circuits etc. which were mounted in the production control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of the memory content. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the light-emitting body control board for performing lighting control of the several light-emitting body which comprises a light-emitting body. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting divided | segmented into a some block. It is a figure which shows the example of a connection setting of a serial output system and a light-emitting body block. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a light-emitting body driver. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a drive control board, and the structural example of the light-emitting body control board for performing lighting control of top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, and right frame LED909c. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for describing each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit illustrated in FIG. 47. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the slew rate setting of the through output of a clock signal and data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a control data format. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal in a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification in case the control signal which one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitter control board outputs is branched on the board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control process process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the terminal of a connector, a harness, and input / output content. It is a figure which shows the execution example of abnormality notification. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of memory inspection processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of calculation content. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a lighting data generation table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of audio | voice data, and the operation example which reproduces | regenerates a music. It is a figure which shows the initial state and operation | movement pattern in an upper side mechanism. It is a figure which shows the initial state and operation | movement pattern in a lower side mechanism.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”) that are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified are displayed variably (variably displayed). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. Thereafter, the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game. The confirmed special symbol may be different from the special symbol displayed during variable display.

  The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (a pattern in which all LEDs are appropriately turned off may be included as a lighting pattern) in which a combination of an LED to be turned on and a light to be turned off in a 7-segment LED are different from each other What is necessary is just to be preset as a special symbol. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that the confirmed decorative design may be different from the decorative design displayed during variable display. For example, a decorative pattern other than the scrolled decorative pattern may be a confirmed decorative pattern.

  As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the special symbol game (also referred to as the first special symbol game) using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronism with the special figure game using the second special figure (also referred to as the second special figure game), a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be distinguished from each other is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is displayed. Derived display (or simply referred to as “derivation”). Note that, for example, various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols are derived and displayed by stopping display of identification information such as decorative symbols (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and terminating variable display. is there. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be stopped and displayed, and for example, a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction may occur. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display unit 5HL, a second hold display unit 5HR, and an active display unit AHA are arranged. The 1st reservation display part 5HL displays the 1st special figure reservation memory number so that identification is possible. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of variable display hold corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The 2nd reservation display part 5HR displays the 2nd special figure reservation memory number so that identification is possible. The second special figure holding memory number is the variable display holding number corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is such that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It occurs based on the start winning by doing. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state (advantageous state), the variable corresponding to the established start condition is satisfied. The display is suspended.

  For example, when a first start prize that causes a game ball to pass (enter) the first start prize opening is generated, the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A (first start condition) ) Is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first special figure holding storage number is 1. Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when the second start winning that the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening is generated, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B (second start condition) ) Is established, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not established, the second special figure holding memory number is 1. Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the hold data (holding memory) is digested, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the second When the execution of the special figure game using the special figure is started, the hold data (hold memory) is digested, and the second special figure hold memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement). If the first special figure holding storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) when the first start winning is generated, the first starting condition is not satisfied, and the start winning is determined. The special figure game based on it may be invalidated and only the payout of prize balls may be performed. Also, if the second special figure holding storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) when the second start winning is generated, the second starting condition is not satisfied, and the start winning is determined. The special figure game based on it may be invalidated and only the payout of prize balls may be performed.

  The variable special display reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is also referred to as a total reserved memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. , A concept including the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number while excluding the total reserved memory number).

  In the first hold display section 5HL, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is performed. The first hold display unit 5HL only needs to be configured so that the first hold display is performed right-justified, for example. The first hold display portion 5HL is provided with four display parts corresponding to “4” which is the upper limit value of the first special figure hold memory number, and the hold numbers “1”, “2” in order from the right end to the left side. ”,“ 3 ”, and“ 4 ”. When the number of holds of the special figure game using the first special figure increases due to the establishment of the first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display part 5HL, the hold on the first hold display part 5HL At the rightmost display portion corresponding to the number “1”, a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold memory number. If there is another first hold display in the first hold display portion 5HL, a new first hold display is hidden on the left side of the display part where the other first hold display is performed. It is added to the part (corresponding to any of the holding numbers “2” to “4”). When there is a plurality of first hold displays in the first hold display section 5HL, and when a special figure game using the first special figure is started due to establishment of a new first start condition, the first hold display section 5HL While deleting (digesting) the first hold display in the rightmost display portion corresponding to the hold number “1”, each of the first hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” Move (shift) in the direction (right side) of the erased display area.

  In the second hold display section 5HR, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure is performed. The second hold display unit 5HR may be configured to perform the second hold display with left justification, for example. The second hold display section 5HR is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit value of the second special figure hold memory number “4”, and the hold numbers “1”, “2” in order from the left end to the right side. ”,“ 3 ”, and“ 4 ”. When the number of holdings of the special figure game using the second special figure increases due to the establishment of the second start condition, if there is no other second holding display in the second holding display part 5HR, the holding in the second holding display part 5HR At the leftmost display portion corresponding to the number “1”, a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented second special figure hold memory number. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display portion 5HR, a new second hold display is hidden on the right side of the display part where the other second hold display is performed. It is added to the part (corresponding to any of the holding numbers “2” to “4”). When there is a plurality of second hold indications in the second hold display portion 5HR, when a special game using the second special drawing is started due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second hold display portion 5HR While deleting (digesting) the second hold display in the leftmost display part corresponding to the hold number “1”, each of the second hold display in the display part corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” Move (shift) in the direction (left side) of the erased display area.

  The first hold display unit 5HL is configured so that the first hold display is performed with right justification, and the first hold display is shifted to the right when digested. It is configured to display 1 hold and may shift to the left when digested. Similarly, the second hold display unit 5HR is configured so that the second hold display is performed with left justification, and the second hold display shifts to the left side when digested. It may be configured to display the second hold display, and shift to the right side when digested.

  The active display unit AHA displays the same effect image as the hold display or a different effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. The display in the active display section AHA is referred to as active display (also referred to as variable display compatible display, digestion display, or current display). In the active display unit AHA, for example, in response to the start of the special game using the first special figure when the first start condition is established, the first display unit 5HL erased (digested) the first special game. 1 Active display corresponding to the hold display is performed. Further, in the active display area AHA, for example, in response to the start of the special game using the second special figure when the second start condition is satisfied, it is erased (digested) in the second hold display part 5HR. An active display corresponding to the second hold display is performed. The first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display only need to have colors and patterns in common. For example, the active display is displayed larger than the first hold display or the second hold display. It may be.

  The first hold display and the second hold display are displays corresponding to the variable display to be executed in the future, and the active display is a display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Also called.

  In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 1, an active display portion AHA is arranged between the first hold display portion 5HL and the second hold display portion 5HR. On the other hand, the active display unit AHA is not limited to the one arranged between the first hold display unit 5HL and the second hold display unit 5HR, and is arranged at an arbitrary position in the display area of the image display device 5. It only has to be. Further, the arrangement of the first hold display section 5HL and the second hold display section 5HR can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the first hold display section 5HL and the second hold display section 5HR may be replaced with each other.

  In addition to the first hold display section 5HL and the second hold display section 5HR, or instead of the first hold display section 5HL and the second hold display section 5HR, a display device for displaying the number of special figure hold memories may be provided. Good. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the first hold display unit 5HL and the second hold display unit 5HR, the number of special figure hold memories can be specified at the top of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B for displaying are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, “4”) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number. For example, four LEDs are included. Here, the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are displayed according to the number of lighted LEDs. In some cases, “variable display related information” is used as a term that collectively refers to information corresponding to each of the above-described hold displays (first hold display and second hold display).

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. (Ordinary electric accessory) is provided and a second start winning opening is formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening. Do not close. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening. ) Make it open. Note that the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second start winning opening, while the expanded opening state when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. Alternatively, the game ball may be configured to be difficult to pass (enter). Thus, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has the first variable state (passing (entry) easy state) such as an open state or an enlarged open state in which the game ball can pass (enter) through the second start winning port, and the game ball. Can be changed to a second variable state (a state in which passage (entry) is difficult (including impossibility of passage (entry))) such as a closed state in which passage (entry) is impossible or a normal open state in which passage (entry) is difficult Has been. The first variable state may be a state in which the game ball is easier to pass (enter) the second start winning opening than the second variable state.

  The game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media), and the first special figure holding memory number is predetermined. Is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is less than a predetermined upper limit value. If so, the second start condition is satisfied.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball enters the big winning opening (for example, Cannot pass). On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become. In this way, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball can easily enter and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter and is disadvantageous for the player. In addition, instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot enter the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball is difficult to enter the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) into the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when a game ball enters the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, for example, the gaming ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening ( More prize balls are paid out than when entering. Therefore, if the special prize winning device 7 is opened, the game ball can pass (enter) into the special prize opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the special prize winning port. The second state is more disadvantageous to the player.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. An ordinary symbol (also called “ordinary diagram” or “ordinary diagram”) that is identification information is displayed variably (variably displayed). Such variable display of normal symbols is referred to as a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. For example, the reserved display 25C is configured to include four LEDs, and is formed in a game area such that a pass gate 41 (a game ball can be passed by a predetermined member). 2 shows the number of ordinary reserved memories as the number of effective passing balls that have passed (detected by two gate switches 21).

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, there is a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. It may be provided. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. . In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. . At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). It has been. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). ing. The trigger button is operated in a predetermined direction by, for example, performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, a left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised so that. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A controller sensor unit 35A including a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower pan body or the like below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35 </ b> B that detects the player's operation act on the push button 31 </ b> B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31 </ b> B.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of receiving a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting and transmitting a control command (such as an effect control command described later) as an example of information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as control of variable display of the figure, or control of normal symbol variable display by the normal symbol display 20 by turning on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 It also has a function to control. The main board 11 also has a function of controlling the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal hold indicator 25C, etc., and displaying various reserved memory numbers.

  On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (detection signals indicating that the passage or entry of game media has been detected (the switch is turned on)) from various switches for detecting game balls, and the game control microcomputer 100. Transmit to. The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100, a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory, or a solenoid for a grand prize opening door. 82.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the electrical parts for production such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 performs all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the on / off operations in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. A function of causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on a signal (sound effect signal) from the effect control board 12, the sound (effect) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A processing circuit for executing sound signal processing for outputting sound (sound designated by a sound signal) is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on a signal (electric decoration signal) from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED A lamp driver circuit or the like that performs lighting / extinguishing driving (lighting / extinguishing according to the drive content indicated by the electrical signal) is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22 </ b> A and second start port switch 22 </ b> B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. Wiring is connected. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example. Further, the main board 11 is connected with wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control, such as the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. The main board 11 is connected to a wiring for transmitting a solenoid drive signal for driving the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door.

  A control signal (control command) transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted as an electrical signal (details will be described later). All the presentation control commands have, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1” and the first bit of the EXT data may be set to “0” in advance.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control microcomputer. Random Access Memory (RAM) 102 that provides a work area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations, and updates numeric data that represents random numbers independently of the CPU 103 And a random number circuit 104 that performs an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby realizing a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the function of the main board 11 is realized). For example). At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 only needs to incorporate the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the like counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register different from the RAM 102. The random number value may be updated by updating the stored value periodically or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 has table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data etc. which comprise are memorize | stored.

  Various data (including various flags, counters, timers, etc.) used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored in the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 so as to be rewritable. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, for example, even if there is a power failure or the like, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (even if there is a so-called power interruption), the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply supplies the power. Until it is disabled, some or all of the contents of RAM 102 are preserved. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data stored in the backup RAM and backed up in this way is appropriately referred to as backup data.

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals are input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. The

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. 5, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in FIG. 5, a random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component (predetermined to the effect electric component). A process for realizing a function for executing the rendering operation) is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 12, numerical data indicating random values for determining various effects, such as a random number value for determining a stop symbol in a variable display of decorative symbols and a random value for determining a notice effect, can be counted. Controlled.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination tables, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is a collection of data for executing various effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects, for example, effect control execution data (display) associated with a determination value such as a process timer determination value. Control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) and process data including an end code.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 stores various data (including various flags, counters, timers, etc.) used for controlling the effect operation. Since the RAM 122 is not a backup RAM, the stored data is lost when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (that is, when there is a power interruption).

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 is based on a display control command or the like from the effect control CPU 120 (for example, the display control unit 123 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 by this command), and the image The control content of the display operation in the display device 5 is determined and executed. For example, the display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to perform variable display of decorative symbols and various types of effect display by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Control. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like. The VDP may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. Port. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a sound effect signal transmitted to the audio control board 13, an electric decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, etc. Is output.

  With the configuration as described above, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R via the sound control board 13 to output sound, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED via the lamp control board 14 and the like. Various effects are executed by performing lighting / extinguishing driving at, or displaying effect images in the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. The game value given in the gaming machine is directly payout of a game ball to be a prize ball or a score equivalent to this. The record information of the game balls and the score corresponding to the number of the game balls may be any value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity. Alternatively, these game balls and score recording information may not be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes, but may have valuable value that can be used for a second game on a gaming machine.

  In addition, the gaming value that can be given in the gaming machine is not limited to paying out a gaming ball as a winning ball or giving a score. For example, it is controlled to a big hit gaming state or a special gaming state such as a probability change state. The maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit gaming state becomes the first round number (for example, “16”) larger than the second round number (for example, “2”), and the execution is performed in a short time state. The upper limit number of possible variable displays is a first number (for example, “100”) larger than the second number (for example, “50”), and the big hit probability in the probability variation state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). ) Higher than the first probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chunks, which is the number of times of repeated control to the big hit gaming state without being controlled to the normal state, is the second consecutive number of chunks (for example, “ Than 5 ”) There first communication Chang number (e.g., "10"), such as part or all of it to be, it may include be a more favorable game situation for the player.

  As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hit ball is based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the launch device. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area enters the first start winning opening (first start area) formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. (The first start port switch 22A is turned on) or the like is satisfied. Thereafter, for example, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended. Be started.

  Further, when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening (second start area) formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. (The second start port switch 22B is turned on) or the like is satisfied. After that, for example, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the end of the previous special game or the big hit game state, the special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. Be started. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the normally open state or closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2 (the gate switch 21 is turned on), the normal symbol display 20 performs variable display of the normal symbol. The usual starting condition for this is established. After that, for example, based on the fact that the general symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display, such as the end of the previous general symbol game, is satisfied, the general symbol game on the normal symbol display device 20 is started. . In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed. Whether or not the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is set as “predetermined per symbol” as the predetermined specific display result is determined when the normal symbol game is started by the normal symbol display 20 or the like. Is determined (predetermined) before derivation display.

  When a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started or when a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, a special game is started. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed, a fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is displayed. Derived and displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (effect symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a fixed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) becomes "big jackpot" (specific display result), and the jackpot as an advantageous state advantageous to the player Controlled to gaming state. Whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, and the loss symbol is derived and displayed, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) is “lost” (non-specific display result).

  As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” is a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating a symbol “−” is a lose symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player. And, in the period until a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the grand prize opening and a winning ball is generated, the grand prize opening is continuously opened. A round game (simply called “round”) is executed. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the grand prize opening, a winning ball (game ball that has entered the big prize opening) is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are awarded as the prize ball for each detection. To be paid out. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “16”) is reached.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” is included. For example, as a result of variable display of a special symbol, when the big hit symbol indicating the number “3” is derived and displayed, the big hit type is “non-probable change”, and when the big hit symbol indicating the number “7” is derived and displayed, The type is “probable change”. Also, when the big hit symbol indicating the number “1” is derived and displayed, the big hit type is “surprise”. When the jackpot type is “probability change” or “non-probability change”, as a round game in the big hit game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a first state (a big prize opening is in an open state) advantageous to the player. The normal open round in which the upper limit time to be a predetermined time (for example, a first period such as 29 seconds) is executed a predetermined number of times such as 16 rounds (16 times). In addition, when the big hit type is “surprise”, as the round game in the big hit game state, the upper limit time for the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to be in the first state (open state with the big winning opening) advantageous to the player Is a predetermined number of times, such as 2 rounds (2 times). Note that the big hit gaming state based on “big hit” when the big hit type is “non-probable change” is referred to as “non-probable big hit game state”. Also, the big hit gaming state based on “big hit” when the big hit type is “probable change” is referred to as “probability big hit game state”. Further, the big hit gaming state based on “big hit” when the big hit type is “surprise” is referred to as “surprise big hit gaming state”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” (big hit probability) may be controlled to a probability change state where the probability is higher than the normal state. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as the start of the next big hit gaming state is satisfied. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to a short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. In the time-short state, one of the time-short end conditions is one of the fact that the variable display (special game) is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) and the next big hit game state is started. It is controlled to continue until it is established first. Note that the remaining number of executions of variable display (such as a special figure game) until the time-shutdown condition is satisfied may be referred to as a time-save remaining number. The short-time state and the probability variation state are also advantageous for the player.

  When a predetermined small hit symbol (for example, “5”) is derived and displayed as a variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes “small bonus”, and the big hit after the big hit gaming state The probability of becoming a small hit that does not change. When a small hit is made, the game is controlled to a small hit gaming state in which the big prize opening is opened twice in substantially the same opening mode (for example, an opening time of 0.5 seconds) as when the big hit is made. As a result, the player cannot specify whether it was a small hit or a sudden big hit from the open mode of the big hit game. Also, when a small hit is made, the gaming state is not controlled to the time-saving state. As a result, when the big winning opening is controlled to the open state twice with a small win, it is possible to give the player an impression as if a sudden big hit has occurred. In other words, the small hit can be used as a so-called false big hit that is a sudden big hit.

  In this mode, the gaming state after the non-probability big hit gaming state is ended becomes a time-short state but does not become a probable variation state. In this embodiment, the gaming state after the probability variation big hit gaming state is finished is a time reduction state and a probability variation state.

  The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a gaming state other than a state advantageous for a player such as a short-time state, a probability variation state, etc. The probability of “winning” and the probability that the variable display result in the special game is “big hit” is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  In the short time state, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is placed in the first variable state (open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening than in the non-short time state that is not in the short time state such as the normal state. Alternatively, the state is changed between an enlarged open state and a second variable state (closed state or normal open state). For example, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol change time (normal diagram change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, or the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is “general”. Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is higher than that in the normal state, and the variable display result is “per figure”. By making the control longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. Thus, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “time-short control” or “high base control”). Is done. By controlling in such a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is achieved.

  Time-short states are also referred to as “high base state”, “high base”, etc., and game states that are not time-short states are also referred to as “low base state”, “low base”, “non-time-short state”, “non-time-short state”, etc. Is called. The probability variation state in which probability variation control is performed is also referred to as “high probability state”, “high probability”, and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is “low probability state”, “low probability”, “non-probability variation state”, “non-probability variation”. Is also said. The game state when the probability change state and the time-short state are set are also referred to as “highly accurate and high base state”, “highly accurate and high base”, and the like. The gaming state when the state is in the short-time state without being in the probable change state is also referred to as “low-accuracy base state”, “low-accuracy base”, or the like. The game state when the state is in the probabilistic state without being in the short-time state is also referred to as “highly accurate low base state”, “highly accurate low base”, or the like. The state that cannot be in either the short-time state or the probability variation state, that is, the normal state is also referred to as “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy low base”, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R In (variable display period), the decorative display variable display mode may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established).

  Here, the reach mode refers to a decorative design that has not yet been stopped when the decorative design that is stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination ("reach variation design"). Is also a display mode in which the variation continues, or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “middle”) that has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) constituting the predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. In the decorative pattern display area 5C, etc.), or in all or part of the display pattern in which the decorative pattern fluctuates, or in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” This is a display mode in which symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination.

  During the variable display of the decorative design, a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a background image is displayed, An effect of reproducing and displaying different moving images is executed. These effects are called effects during variable display together with variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the variable display effect is an effect by an image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, and is a concept including the variable symbol display itself. Making the variable display mode a reach mode is one of the effects during variable display. In the variable display effect, in addition to the effect by the image (including the variable display of the decorative pattern itself) displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 along with the variable display of the special symbol, the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, effects such as lighting operation (flashing operation) in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included.

  In the variable display effect, a reach effect may be executed. The reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode. Reach effects can be achieved by reducing the fluctuating speed of the decorative pattern, displaying a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5, or changing the display mode of the background image. It is an effect that performs an effect operation different from that before reaching the reach mode, by playing a video that is different from the decorative pattern, or by changing the change mode of the decorative pattern. The reach effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. In this embodiment, normal reach, super reach A, super reach B, and rush / small hit exclusive reach are provided as reach effects.

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike the reach effect, the variable display of decorative symbols can indicate the possibility that the variable display status of decorative symbols will reach the reach state and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is executed depending on the mode or the like. As an example, it is only necessary that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect can be executed during decorative display of the decorative design. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo continuous change) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. This is the number of times that the decorative symbols re-variate in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As an example, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chances of special combinations are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A decorative symbol that is one of the various types of lost combinations is displayed temporarily. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed to the player by, for example, performing a fluctuation display or changing the decorative symbol again immediately after stopping for a short time. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the decoration design which is not decided. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the decorative symbol may be re-fluctuated after the decorative symbol is stopped to such an extent that the player recognizes that the decorative symbol once displayed is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, for example, as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) increases, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases. Thus, the player can recognize that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is performed by displaying the pseudo-continuous chance temporarily stopped, and the variable display result is increased as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. The expectation of becoming a “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed once or twice, so that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative pattern has been started 2 to 3 times in succession. Note that the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations (revariations) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect may be, for example, four or five.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, a re-change effect such as a related display effect is executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change (pseudo-continuous change). Also good. As an example, a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image may be displayed on the image display device 5 during the period of each variable display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. Further, for example, the most variable effect may be executed by performing an arbitrary effect operation such as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and a lighting operation of another light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9.

  In addition to “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using variable display operation of decorative symbols include, for example, “slip”, “development chance eyes”, “end of development chance eyes”, “after chance eye stop” Various presentation operations such as “slip” may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “sliding”, “variable” of “left”, “middle”, “right” from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol to the display of the definite decorative symbol that is the variable display result is displayed. After changing the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, single or plural decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols at, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbols) of the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols are displayed. An effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped is performed by changing the decorative symbol again after changing the decorative symbol again in either or both of the display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R).

  In the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, the decoration of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern that results in the variable display. In all of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is set as the reach state. Reach production begins. On the other hand, in the variable display effect of “end of development opportunity”, after the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols of the lost combinations (special combinations) that are the pseudo-continuous chances in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, Unlike the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect that changes the decorative symbols again in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols change again in some of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  During variable display of decorative patterns, unlike variable display effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-continuous”, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, a message image or voice output is displayed. There is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the symbol variable display operation, that a reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is `` A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility of being a “hit”.

  The effect operation as the notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbols after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is only necessary to be executed (started) prior to the reach mode (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “hit” may include one that is executed after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols until the fixed special symbols and fixed decorative symbols that result in variable display are derived. Anything that can give notice of sex is acceptable. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation (effect mode) when such a notice effect is executed.

  The notice effect includes a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as a pre-read effect). The pre-reading notice effect indicates that the variable display result is “big hit” according to the production mode before the variable display that is subject to notice (the notice target) is the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”. It is a notice effect that can be announced in advance. In particular, a pre-reading notice effect that continuously gives notice over a variable display of decorative symbols that is executed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of special drawing games is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. In the pre-reading notice effect, before the variable display subject to the notice is started, for example, the possibility that the variable display result may be a “hit” based on the reserved memory of the special figure game due to the occurrence of the start winning prize, etc. A production operation is started. In this embodiment, as such a pre-reading notice effect, the variable display result may be “big hit” by changing the display mode of the hold display (first hold display, second hold display) of the notice target. It is possible to execute a hold notice effect that can be noticed. Specifically, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a hold notice effect that changes the display shape and color of the hold display step by step to a shape and color different from the normal time according to the change pattern according to the type of the background image. It is. In the active display in which the hold display is shifted, the display shape and color may be changed.

  In contrast to the pre-reading notice effect, the notice effect that is executed after the variable display subject to notice is started is “single notice effect” (“single notice”, “the relevant change notice”, or “variable display in progress”. It is also called “notice production”.

  In addition, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, an effect that suggests that the display mode changes may be executed. When the action effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display changes as a result of the action effect. The action effect may include an arbitrary effect operation such as a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and a lighting operation of another light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9.

  Next, main operations (actions) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are described. In the following, the operation will be described with reference to a flowchart and the like, but in each operation (each process), a process that does not appear in the flowchart may be appropriately performed.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt process includes, for example, a switch process, a main side error process, an information output process, a game random number update process, a special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process, and a command control process. A process for controlling the progress of the game is included. At the end of the game control timer interrupt process, the interrupt enabled state is set. As a result, the game control timer interrupt process is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, that is, every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) which is the supply interval of the interrupt request signal.

  The switch process is performed by determining whether a detection signal is input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. This is a process for determining for each switch whether or not it is in an ON state (that is, whether or not a game ball has entered or passed).

  The main-side error process is a process of performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result.

  The information output process is, for example, a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software. As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side include a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. It only has to be included (see FIG. 6). The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit game state with “1”. Any of the values of “65535” can be taken. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is a random value used to determine the big hit type as “probable change” or “non-probable change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. It can take any value from “100” to “100”. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of variation patterns prepared in advance. It can take any value of “900”.

  In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special symbol game is set as a big hit. Determination of whether or not to control the game state, determination of variation pattern, control of display operation in the special symbol display device 4 based on the determination result (execution of special game), special variable winning ball device 7 in the big hit gaming state In order to perform the opening / closing operation setting (execution of round game or short-term opening control) of the special prize opening in the predetermined procedure, various processes are selected and executed. Although the details of the special symbol process will be described later, by executing the special symbol process every time a timer interrupt occurs, the variable display result and the variation pattern are determined, the special symbol game is executed based on the determination, and the jackpot gaming state Etc. are realized.

  In the normal symbol process, for example, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 (for example, when it is determined in the switch process that the gate switch 21 is turned on), the number of holds reaches the upper limit. If there is not, hold storage of the usual game (for example, extract a random value and store it in the RAM 102), or use the hold memory (random value stored in the RAM 102) to determine the variable display result of the usual game. Or, the variation pattern (variation time, etc.) of the normal game is determined, or the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) in the normal symbol display device 20 is controlled according to the variation pattern, thereby variably displaying the normal symbol. When the variable display result is per game, the first variable variable winning ball device 6B is opened when the variable display result is per game. Or performs the process to change state. By executing the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupt occurs, the execution of the normal game, the first variable state of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B at the time of the normal game, etc. are realized.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, and the like, transmission setting of a control command (production control command or the like) (for example, storing a storage address value of a control command to be transmitted is stored in the RAM 102) is performed. In the process, a process of actually transmitting the transmission-set control command to the effect control board 12 is performed. In this transmission process, an effect control INT signal or the like is used, and a control command is transmitted.

  After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Here, main effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the command control process will be described with reference to FIG. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number.

  The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern designation command) for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of a special symbol. In this form, a variation pattern designation command corresponding to each variation pattern is set. For example, a unique number (variation pattern number) is assigned to each variation pattern, and the number is set to “XX” in the command (for example, “01” for the variation pattern PA1-1). The variation pattern designation command is also a command for designating the start of variation of decorative symbols.

  The command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first start prize opening designation command) for designating that a first start prize has occurred due to the entry of a game medium into the first start prize opening. The command 8A02 (H) is an effect control command (second start prize opening designation command) for designating that a second start prize has occurred due to the entry of a game medium into the second start prize opening. The first start winning port designation command and the second start winning port designation command may be collectively referred to as a start winning port designation command.

  Command 8CXX (H) is an effect control command (display result designation command) that designates whether or not to make a big hit and designates a big hit type, that is, designates a variable display result. In this form, a display result designation command corresponding to each display result is set. For example, a unique number is assigned to each display result, and the number is set to “XX” in the command (for example, “00” for “losing”, “big hit” for the big hit type “probable change”). "01").

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first variation start designation command) that designates the start of variable display (variation) of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second variation start designation command) for designating the start of variable display (variation) of the second special symbol. The first variation start designation command and the second variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a variation start designation command. Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or to start variable display of the second special symbol may be included in a later-described variation pattern determination result designation command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for designating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbols is terminated and the display result (stopped symbols) is derived and displayed.

  Command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (game state designation command) for designating a game state. In this form, a gaming state designation command corresponding to each gaming state is set. For example, if the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base), “XX” is set to “00”. For example, if the gaming state is a high probability low base state, “XX” is set to “01”. For example, “XX” is set to “02” if the gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state.

  The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot start designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot gaming state (start of fanfare). The fanfare is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state and notifies that the big hit gaming state has been entered. Command A100 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start specifying command) that specifies the start of the small hit gaming state.

  The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command for opening a special prize opening) that designates opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A3XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big prize opening) that designates closing of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  Command A601 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot end designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot gaming state (start of ending). Note that the ending is an effect for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state, which is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. Command A 602 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit gaming state.

  Command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first special figure reserved memory number designation command) for designating the first special figure reserved memory number. “XX” indicates the first special figure reservation storage number. Command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second special figure reserved memory number designation command) for designating the second special figure reserved memory number. “XX” indicates the second special figure reservation storage number. The first special figure reserved memory number designation command and the second special figure reserved memory number designation command may be collectively referred to as a “special figure pending memory number designation command”.

  Command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (design determination result designation command) for designating a display result among the determination results at the time of starting winning. Command C5XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern determination result designation command) for designating a variation pattern among the determination results at the time of starting winning. In this embodiment, random numbers MR1 to MR3 are extracted when a first start winning or a second starting winning occurs in the process of step S101 described later. The variable display corresponding to the extracted random values MR1 to MR3 can be changed based on the random values MR1 and MR3 of the extracted random values MR1 to MR3 before the variable display start condition is satisfied. It is determined whether or not the display result is “big hit” and the variable display variation pattern (see FIG. 12). The determination at the time of starting winning means these determinations, and is executed in the winning random number determination process in step S213. Note that this determination may not be performed in a predetermined case. A unique number is assigned to the determination result (including the case of no determination) about the display result, and the number is set to “XX” in the symbol designating command (for example, “No determination” 00 ”,“ 01 ”if“ lost ”,“ 02 ”if“ big hit ”, etc.). A unique number is assigned to the determination result (including the case of no determination) regarding the variation pattern, and the number is set to “XX” in the variation pattern designation command (for example, if “no determination”) "11" for "00", "PA1-1", "12" for "PA1-2", "31" for "PB1-1", "61" for "PC1-1" "Such).

  Next, the special symbol process will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101. When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is turned on ( Step S201). When it is determined in the switch process that the first start port switch 22A is on, for example, because the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the CPU 103 displays the first special drawing. It is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the used special figure game, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 stores the first stored value of a first special figure reserved memory number counter (counter that counts the first special figure reserved memory number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit). It suffices if the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved memory number count value. When it is determined in step S202 that the first special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S202; No), the CPU 103 stores a start-up buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102. The starting port buffer value, which is a value, is set to “1” (step S203).

  When it is determined in step S201 that the first start-up switch 22A is off (step S201; No), or when it is determined in step S202 that the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit (step S202; In Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is on (step S204). If it is determined in the switch process that the second start port switch 22B is on, for example, because the second start port switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), the CPU 103 displays the second special drawing. It is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the used special figure game, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 stores the second stored value of the second special figure reserved memory number counter (counter for counting the second special figure reserved memory number) provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102. It suffices if the second special figure reserved memory number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved memory number count value. When it is determined in step S205 that the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value (step S205; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value to “2” (step S206). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S204; No), or when it is determined that the second special figure reservation storage number is the upper limit value (step S205; Yes), the CPU 103 The start winning determination process is terminated.

  After executing either of the processes of step S203 or S206, the CPU 103 updates the special figure reserved memory number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first special figure reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure reserved memory number count value is increased. Add one. Thus, the first special figure reserved memory count value increases by 1 when the game ball enters the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). Also, the second special figure reserved memory count value increases by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S208).

  After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number circuit 104 or random data provided by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.) Numerical data (see FIG. 6) indicating the numerical value MR1, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. At this time, when the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 can control the first hold indicator 25A and specify the first special figure hold memory number added by one. May be displayed on the first hold indicator 25A (for example, the number of lighted LEDs is increased by one). When the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display a display that can specify the number of the second special figure hold memory added by one. You may make it make the 2nd holding | maintenance display device 25B perform (for example, increase the number of lighting of LED by 1).

  The first special figure storage unit shown in FIG. 7A is not started yet, although a game ball has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and a first start winning has occurred. On-hold data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the like as the reserved data. Is stored until reaching a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). Thus, the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game On-hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state based on (special drawing display result), or whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach effect, etc.) It becomes stored information.

  Note that the hold number in the first special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled on the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. For this reason, when the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number “1”, the hold display symbol is displayed at the leftmost first display position of the first hold display portion 5HL. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number “2”, the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position on the right side of the first display position of the first hold display portion 5HL. To do.

  The second special figure storage unit shown in FIG. 7B is not yet started, although the game ball has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start winning has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game that is not present (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the like, as the reserved data. The data is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. Thus, the hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game On-hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state based on (special drawing display result), or whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach effect, etc.) It becomes stored information.

  Note that the hold number in the second special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled on the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. For this reason, when the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number “1”, the hold display symbol is displayed at the leftmost first display position of the second hold display portion 5HR. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number “2”, the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position on the right side of the first display position of the second hold display portion 5HR. To do.

  After executing the process of step S210, the CPU 103 performs a setting for transmitting a start winning opening designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S211). Thereafter, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a reserved memory number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S212).

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process (step S213). As described above, the winning random number determination process is a process for determining the start winning prize, and based on the random values MR1 and MR3 among the random values MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S209, This is a process of determining whether or not the variable display result of the variable display to be executed is “big hit” or “small hit” and the variation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 12). Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S214). At this time, if it is determined that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S214; “2”), the CPU 103 clears the starting port buffer and initializes the stored value to “0” ( Step S215), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is “1” (step S214; “1”), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to “0”. (Step S216), the process proceeds to step S204. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S213 in FIG. 5 as the winning random number determination process. In this mode, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol display processing (variable display result of special symbols) is set to “big hit” or “small bonus” by special symbol normal processing. A determination is made whether to control to the small hit gaming state. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the winning random number value determination process, the game ball is extracted at the start winning timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning port (the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port). Whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target of the random number value (the random value extracted in the process of step S209) is “big hit” or “small hit”, or the variable display of decorative symbols The change pattern is determined (so-called “look ahead”). As a result, the special figure display result is “big hit” or before the variable display of the special symbol or decoration symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started (before the special game start condition is established). Pre-reading that “small hit” or the decorative display variable display form becomes the predetermined display form, and based on the pre-read result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the side of the effect control board 12 A display mode or the like can be determined.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 8, first, the CPU 103, for example, a time reduction flag (a flag that is turned on in the time reduction state) provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102, The current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by checking the state of the probability variation flag (the flag that is turned on when the probability variation state is set) (step S301). The CPU 103 checks whether or not the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit gaming state by confirming a value of a special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control flag control unit). Is identified. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is “4” to “7”, the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified as the big hit gaming state.

  Subsequent to the process of step S301, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the identified gaming state is a big hit in which a big hit gaming state is set (step S302). When it is determined that it is not a big hit (step S302; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether or not it is in the high base where the high opening control associated with the time reduction control is performed in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S303). ). When it is determined that the high base is in effect (step S303; Yes), or when it is determined that the jackpot is being hit in the process of step S302 (step S402; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value to “2”. It is determined whether or not there is (step S304). When it is determined that the starting port buffer value is not “2” (step S304; No), the CPU 103 performs setting for limiting the determination at the time of winning (step S306).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is “2” (step S304; Yes), or when it is determined that the high base is not in the process of step S303 (step S303; No), the CPU 103 From the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table shown in 10 (A) and (B), it corresponds to the starting port buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current gaming state. The special figure display result determination table used for determining the special figure display result is selected (step S305).

  Following the processing of step S305, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307). For example, the CPU 103 compares the individual determination values included in the jackpot determination range with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S209 shown in FIG. The presence or absence of a decision value that matches MR1 may be determined. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, when it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be “big hit” (big hit start determination) it can.

  In the process of step S307, for example, the CPU 103 may read the random value MR1 stored in the special figure reservation storage unit in step S210 and perform the above determination using the read random number value MR1. In addition to the step S210, the CPU 103 holds the random value MR1 in a predetermined area (an area other than the special figure holding storage unit) of the RAM 102, a storage area of the CPU 103, and the like, and makes the above determination based on the held random value. May be performed. The same applies to a random value MR3 described later. Thus, the random value used in the winning random number determination process may not be the random value stored in the special figure storage unit.

  When it is determined in the process of step S307 that the game is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S308). At this time, the CPU 103 responds according to the fluctuation special figure corresponding to the start port buffer value ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2"). The jackpot type determination table data is selected from the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The CPU 103 refers to the selected jackpot type determination table data to determine which of the multiple jackpot types is determined.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S308, the CPU 103 selects a later-described jackpot variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 13) prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 and sets it in the usage table (step S309). . The big hit variation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display variation pattern in which the variable display result is “big hit”, and a determination value to be compared with the random value MR3 is assigned to each variation pattern.

  In the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13, the determination ratio is described instead of the range of the determination value. In the actual table, it suffices if a determined value in a range corresponding to the determined ratio in FIG. 13 is assigned to each variation pattern. The determination ratio is a ratio in which the entire range (1 to 900) of values that the random number MR3 can take is 100. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, when the big hit type is probabilistic / non-probable, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PB1-1 is 5, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 is 25, and the fluctuation pattern PB1- Since the decision ratio of 3 is 70, decision values 1 to 45 (range of 5%) to be compared with the random number value MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern PB1-1, and the random value MR3 is assigned to the variation pattern PB1-2. Decided values 46 to 270 (range of 25%) to be compared are assigned, and decided values 271 to 900 (range of 70%) to be compared with the random value MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns PB1-3. Such determination value assignment is the same for other tables in which determination ratios are described.

  When it is determined in step S307 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S307; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step S307). S310). The CPU 103 executes the same process as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determined value assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit” in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S305. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the small hit determination range.

  When it is determined that it is within the range of the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), a small hit variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 13B) prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected. Then, the usage table is set (step S312). The small hit variation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display variation pattern in which the variable display result is “small hit”, and a determination value to be compared with the random number MR3 is assigned to each variation pattern. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not within the range of the small hit determination range (step S310; No), a loss variation pattern determination table (FIG. 13C, FIG. )) Is selected and set in the use table (step S311). Specifically, when the current gaming state identified in step S301 is a non-short-time state (low base state) (when the short-time flag is off), the loss variation pattern determination table of FIG. When the current gaming state specified in step S301 is the short-time state (high base state) (when the short-time flag is on), the loss variation pattern determination table in FIG. Set in the usage table. The loss variation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display variation pattern in which the variable display result is “lost”, and a determination value to be compared with the random value MR3 is assigned to each variation pattern.

  After executing any of steps S309, S311, and S312, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot variation pattern set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random value MR3 extracted in step S209. With reference to any one of the table, the small hit variation pattern determination table, and the loss variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern assigned to the determination value that matches the random number MR3 is determined (step S313). The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern by, for example, comparing each determination value assigned to each variation pattern with the random value MR3 to determine whether there is a determination value that matches the random value MR3. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined value assigned to each variation pattern is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR3 and the minimum value of the determined value. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined by comparing with the maximum value.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S306 and S313, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the start winning command having the contents corresponding to the determination result in step S308 and step S313 (step S314), and the random number value determining process in winning Exit. The start winning time command includes a start winning opening designation command, a special figure reserved memory number designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern judgment result designation command. When the start port buffer value is “1”, the first start winning port designation command, the first special figure reserved memory number designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are designated as commands for starting prizes. Command and send settings. When the start port buffer value is “2”, the second start winning port designation command, the second special figure reserved memory number designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are designated as commands for starting prizes. Command and send settings. The command set for transmission is transmitted in the command control process.

  The first special figure reserved memory number designation command and the second special figure reserved memory number designation command to be set for transmission are commands for specifying the current first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number (the number of such memories). The special figure reserved memory number to be specified may be specified by the count value of the first special figure reserved memory number counter or the second special figure reserved memory number counter. When the determination result in step S307 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes), the symbol designation command to be set for transmission is a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is “big hit” (“big hit”). If the determination result in step S307 is the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), a command (" A command including EXT data corresponding to “small hit”, and when the determination result in step S310 is not the small hit determination range (step S310; No), a command for designating that the determination result of the variable display result is “losing” (Command including EXT data corresponding to “losing”), and determination in step S303 When the result is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S304; No), a command (including EXT data corresponding to “no determination”) that designates “no determination” for which the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed is performed. Command). The variation pattern determination result designation command to be set for transmission is a command (command including EXT data corresponding to the variation pattern which is the determination result) for designating the variation pattern which is the determination result when the variation pattern is determined in step S313. When the determination result of step S304 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S304; No), a command ("corresponding to" no determination "" for designating that "no determination" has not been made at the start winning determination. Command including data).

  In the winning random number determination process, as described above, regarding the variable display corresponding to the random values MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S209 this time, the variable display result of the variable display (special game) is “big hit” or “small” It is determined whether or not it is “winning” and the variation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 13), and so-called prefetching is performed. In this process, the determination is made based on the current gaming state and not based on the gaming state when the variable display is actually executed, so the determination is not necessarily accurate, but to some extent Variable display results and fluctuation patterns can be predicted with accuracy. In the winning random number determination process, the process is started by the process of step S304 when it is determined that the big win is determined in the process of step S302, or when the time reduction control is determined in the process of step S303. It is determined whether or not the mouth buffer value is “2”. At this time, when the start port buffer value is “1” and not “2”, the process proceeds to the process of step S314 without executing the process of step S305 and the like, and the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed. Thus, when the high opening control associated with the short-time control is performed or when the game is in the big hit game state, each of the above-mentioned each is based on the occurrence of the start winning (first start winning) due to the game ball entering the first start winning opening. Limit the decision not to be made. Thus, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the first start winning prize is given during the time-saving control or the big hit gaming state. The soundness of the game can be ensured by restricting the prefetch based on the game from being executed.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 performs steps S110 to S120 in accordance with the value of the special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102. Select one of the processes to execute.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the first special symbol display unit 4A, the second special symbol reservation storage unit, the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the like are stored on the basis of the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determined by the variable display result. Make a decision (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, if the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. The data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, whereby the jackpot type is stored. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Lost symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 shown in FIG. When the special symbol normal process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol holding storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 only has to read the second special figure reserved memory number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” (step S231; No), the CPU 103, for example, the first area of the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the reservation number “1”). As storage data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a storage area corresponding to “”), numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read (step S232). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (second start winning) at the second start winning opening in the process of step S209 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in a random number buffer for variation, for example, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S232, the CPU 103 updates the second special figure reserved memory number to be decremented by 1, for example, by subtracting and updating the second special figure reserved memory number count value by one, and the like. The contents stored in the second special figure storage unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the reservation data stored in the storage area lower than the holding number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “4”) in the second special figure holding storage unit is higher by one entry ( Shift to storage areas corresponding to the holding numbers “1” to “3”. Further, in the process of step S233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the CPU 103 updates the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, to “2” (step S234). .

  When it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S231; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S231: Yes). Step S235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 only has to read the first special figure reserved memory number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. Thus, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  If the special game is executed in the order in which the game balls enter the start winning opening regardless of whether it is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening And the starting opening data indicating which game ball has entered into the second starting winning opening is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in association with the holding number together with the holding data or separately from the holding data, What is necessary is just to make it possible to specify the order in which the start conditions are established for the special game corresponding to each hold data.

  When it is determined in step S235 that the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” (step S235; No), for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponds to the head area (for example, the reservation number “1”). Numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out as reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (step S236). Thereby, the game random number extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning (first start winning) at the first start winning opening in the process of step S236 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in a random number buffer for variation, for example, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S236, the CPU 103 updates the first special figure reserved memory number to be decremented by 1, for example by subtracting and updating the first special figure reserved memory number count value by one, and the like. The contents stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the first special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time ( Shift to storage areas corresponding to the holding numbers “1” to “3”. Further, in the process of step S237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be decremented by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the CPU 103 determines the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, as either “big hit” or “losing” (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the special figure display result. For example, the CPU 103 sets the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10 as a use table. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates the special figure display result as “big hit” and “lost”. It is only necessary to be assigned to the determination result of whether or not the game state is the probability variation state.

  The CPU 103 reads the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result included in the gaming random number temporarily stored in the variation random number buffer in step S232 or S236 from the variation random number buffer, and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state. Whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state to the determined value that matches the random value MR1 by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on whether there is a numerical value indicating the random value MR1 Accordingly, the assigned determination result of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing” may be determined as the special figure display result.

  In this embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, a first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10A and a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. It is prepared. The first special figure display result determination table displays the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as “big hit” and whether to control the small hit game state as the “small hit” based on the random display value MR1 for determining the special figure display result This is a table that is referred to. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shows the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as "big hit" and whether to control the small hit game state as "small hit" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table that is referenced to determine.

  In the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10A, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short time state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state). Accordingly, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10B, the special figure depends on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the short-time state (low probability state), or the probability variation state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the first special figure display result decision table or the second special figure display result decision table, the table data indicating the decision value compared with the random value MR1 for special figure display result decision has the special figure display result as “big hit”. It is data for determination assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state. In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), it is more than the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). Many decision values are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” compared to the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). If the state is controlled, the probability of being determined increases. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state, it is a big hit compared to the normal state and the short time state The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined when controlling to the gaming state is increased.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table, a predetermined range of determined values (values in the range of “30000” to “30100”) are assigned to the special figure display results of “small hits”. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. With such a setting, the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, The case where the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established. The ratio determined to be controlled in the small hit gaming state as “small hit” can be varied.

  In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” to control the small hit gaming state. In a game state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, such as a probability variation state (high probability high base state), frequent small hit game states in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball Thus, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interests due to the extended game. In the second special figure display result determination table, a predetermined range of determination values different from the settings in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the “small hit” special figure display result. . For example, in the second special figure display result determination table, a smaller decision value than the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the “small hit” special figure display result. In this way, when the high base state such as the short-time state or the probability change state is set, the proportion determined to be controlled in the small hit gaming state may be lower than when the low base state such as the normal state or the short-time probability change state is used. Good. Alternatively, regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result is determined by referring to the common special figure display result determination table and determining the special figure display result. A decision may be made.

  Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is “big hit” (step S240). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S240; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 to an on state (step S241). In addition, the CPU 103 determines the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in a use table for determining the jackpot type. For example, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10C as a use table. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10C, the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change” and “ It is only necessary to be assigned to “Accuracy”.

  The CPU 103 reads the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type included in the gaming random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in step S232 or S236 from the random number buffer for variation, and the jackpot read from the random number buffer for variation Based on the numerical data indicating the type-determining random value MR2, by referring to the jackpot type determination table set in the use table, one of the jackpot types to which the decision value matching the random number MR2 is assigned is selected. do it.

  FIG. 10C shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table is used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”. It is a table that is referred to. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the special symbol that is variably displayed (changed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second). Depending on whether it is a special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4B, the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is a plurality of values such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. Assigned to the type of jackpot type.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table, the assignment of the decision value to the big hit type of “surprise” differs depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure, the predetermined value (a value in the range of “70” to “99”) is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”, while the fluctuation special figure Is the second special figure, no decision value is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “surprising” can be varied. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the big hit type is “surprise” and the short-open big hit state is controlled. In the gaming state where the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the device 6B, the frequent occurrence of the short-term open big hit state in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball is avoided, and the deterioration of the game interest due to the extended game is prevented. it can.

  Even when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a predetermined range of determined values different from the case where the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. Good. For example, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a smaller decision value may be assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type than when the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure. Alternatively, regardless of whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined with reference to the common table data.

  After executing the process of step S242, the CPU 103 stores the jackpot type (step S243). The CPU 103 stores a jackpot type buffer setting value indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102 (for example, “0” in the case of “non-probable change”). ”And“ 1 ”in the case of“ probability change ”), the jackpot type may be stored.

  When it is determined that the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S240; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S244). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S244; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 to an ON state (step S245).

  After executing the process of step S243, after executing the process of step S245, or when determining that the special figure display result is not “small hit” in the process of step S244 (step S244; No) The CPU 103 determines a confirmed special symbol that becomes a variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game (step S246). For example, if it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the CPU 103 determines a plurality of types of big hit symbols according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242 (according to the big hit type buffer setting value). As one of the predetermined special symbols, the fixed special symbol is determined. If it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the CPU 103 determines one of the special symbols predetermined as the small hit symbol as a confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S244 that the special symbol display result is not “small hit”, the CPU 103 determines a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol as a confirmed special symbol.

  After executing the process of step S246, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “1” (step S247), and ends the special symbol normal process. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in step S247, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process in step S111 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

  In the process of step S235, if it is determined that the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a predetermined demonstration display setting ( Step S248), the special symbol normal process is terminated. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the control board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, after setting the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration display setting is terminated. The effect control board 12 displays a demonstration screen when a customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. Since the variation pattern designates the content (variable display mode) of the variable display of the decorative design, the content of the variable display of the decorative design is determined by this determination. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time (special diagram variation time) from the start of variable symbol special display until the finalized special symbol resulting in variable display is derived is determined. Is done. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). When it is determined that the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S262). When it is determined in the process of step S261 that the big hit flag is in an off state (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is in an on state (step S263). When it is determined that the small hit flag is in the on state (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the small hit when the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S264). On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is in the off state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result is “lost” (step S265).

  FIG. 12 shows a specific example of the variation pattern.

  The variation pattern PA1-1 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, specifies non-reach (the variable display mode does not become the reach mode), and the special figure variation time is normal. This is a non-reach variation pattern of length.

  The variation pattern PA1-2 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, designates non-reach (the variable display mode does not become the reach mode), and the special figure variation time than usual. This is a non-reach fluctuation pattern for short time.

  The variation pattern PA2-1 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PA2-2 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of super reach A. The variation pattern PA2-3 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of super reach B.

  The fluctuation pattern PB1-1 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of normal reach. The fluctuation pattern PB1-2 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of super reach A. The fluctuation pattern PB1-3 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of super reach B.

  The variation pattern PC1-1 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” and when the variable display result is “small hit”, and designates non-reach. Non-reach variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern PC1-2 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, and when the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of reach. Here, the reach / small hit-only reach is a reach that can be selected and determined only when the variable display result is a sudden big hit or a small hit. The decorative pattern for the big hit is a pattern in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed as “3”, “5”, and “7”. The small hitting decorative pattern is a state in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is stopped and displayed with “2”, “4”, and “6”.

  In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 11, for example, the big hit fluctuation pattern is determined using the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13A stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance. As an example, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the variation pattern determination result. The CPU 103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer, so that the variation allocated to the determination value that matches the random number value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. In FIG. 13A, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

  In the process of step S264 shown in FIG. 11, for example, a variation pattern at the time of small hit is determined using the small hit variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13B stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101. . As an example, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination may be assigned to the variation pattern determination result. The CPU 103 is assigned to the determined value that matches the random value MR3 by referring to the small hit variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the variation random number buffer. The variation pattern may be determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. In FIG. 13, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value. In FIG. 13B, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

  In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 11, for example, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the loss is determined using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. Is done. When the gaming state is the non-time-short state (the time-short flag is off), the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. When the gaming state is the short time state (the short time flag is on), the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. As an example, in each loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer, and thereby the variation allocated to the determination value that matches the random value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. In FIGS. 13C and 13D, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

  In the loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 13C and 13D, the variation pattern PA1-2 having a short special diagram variation time is easily selected in the short-time state, and the average is larger than that in the non-short-time state. The variable display time can be shortened, and the occurrence of invalid start winnings can be suppressed, and the stoppage of the game ball by the player (so-called “stopping”) can be reduced. Moreover, the execution frequency of variable display can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 13, at the big hit (probability / non-probability), the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PB1-3 for executing the super reach B is the highest, the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 of the super reach A, and the fluctuation of the normal reach. The determination ratio is gradually decreased in the order of the pattern PB1-1. At the time of losing, the determination ratio of the non-reach fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (including PA1-2) is the highest, the normal reach fluctuation pattern PA2-1, the super reach A fluctuation pattern PA2-2, and the super reach B. The determination ratio gradually decreases in the order of the fluctuation pattern PA2-3. From this, when the super reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes “big hit” at the highest rate. Then, in the order of super reach A and normal reach, the rate at which the variable display result becomes “big hit” (so-called big hit expectation) decreases.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, at the time of big hit (probability), the determination ratio of the variation pattern PC1-2 of the accuracy / small hit reach is higher than the determination ratio of the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1. On the other hand, at the small hit, the determination ratio of the non-reach fluctuation pattern PC1-1 is higher than the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PC1-2 of the abrupt / small hit reach. From this, when the variation pattern PC1-2 of the sudden / small hit reach is executed, the variable display result tends to be “big hit (surprise)”, and when the non-reach fluctuation pattern PC1-1 is executed, The variable display result tends to be “small hit”.

  After executing any one of steps S262, S264, and S265, the CPU 103 sets a special figure change time (also referred to as a change time) that is a variable symbol display time (step S266). The special figure change time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special display result) is derived and displayed. It is. As shown in FIG. 12, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which a special symbol or decorative symbol variable display result is derived by setting a special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in each process of steps S262, S264, and S265. The special figure change time is set by, for example, setting a timer value corresponding to the special figure change time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Following the process of step S266, a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special symbol games for which the condition is satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Thereby, a special figure game is started. When starting variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display the first special figure hold memory number subtracted by 1 from the first display. You may make it carry out to the hold | maintain indicator 25A (for example, reduce the number of lighting of LED by 1). When starting the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display the second special figure hold memory number subtracted by one for the second display. You may make it carry out to the holding | maintenance indicator 25B (for example, reduce the number of lighting of LED by 1).

  After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 sends a special symbol change start command (change start command) to notify the effect control board 12 of the special figure display result, the change pattern determination result, and the like. Transmission setting is performed (step S268). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends the first variation start designation command, the variation pattern designation command ( A command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262 or S263), a display result specifying command (a command including EXT data indicating the variable display result determined in step S244), a first special figure reserved memory number specifying command ( The first special figure reserved memory count value decremented by 1 in step S237, that is, a command including EXT data indicating the first special figure reserved memory number when one reserved memory is consumed when the special figure game is started. Perform transmission settings for sequential transmission. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a second variation start designation command, a variation pattern designation command ( A command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262 or S263), a display result specifying command (a command including EXT data indicating the variable display result determined in step S244), a second special figure reserved memory number specifying command ( The second special figure reserved memory count value decremented by 1 in step S233, that is, a command including EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory count when one reserved memory is consumed when the special figure game is started. Perform transmission settings for sequential transmission.

  After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to “2” (step S267), and then ends the variation pattern setting process. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S267, when the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process in step S112 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process of subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer. Then, when the timer value of the game control process timer (the timer value after subtracting 1) is not 0, the special figure variation time has not elapsed, so control for executing variable display of the special figure game (for example, the first 1st special symbol display device by performing a control to transmit a display signal of 1 special figure or 2nd special figure (including an update for maintaining the display of special symbols for a predetermined time as appropriate). In 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, a process for changing the special symbol is performed, and the special symbol changing process is terminated. On the other hand, when the timer value of the game control process timer becomes 0 and the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display In the device 4B, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and the fixed special symbol (the fixed special symbol set in step S110) that is the variable symbol display result is stopped (derived display) (the fixed special symbol is displayed for a predetermined time). In addition, when the display is stopped, the symbol confirmation designation command is set to be transmitted, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”. By repeatedly executing step S112 each time a timer interrupt occurs, special symbol variable display, fixed special symbol derivation display, and the like are realized.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit flag is on. When the big hit flag is in the on state, the CPU 103 makes settings for ending the special game state such as the probability change state or the short time state. For example, the probability variable flag and the time reduction flag are reset (turned off), and the count of the time reduction counter that counts the remaining number of times of variable display (remaining time reduction) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is executed. A process of setting the count value of the short time counter to “0” to count the value is performed. Then, a timer value corresponding to the fanfare waiting time (the waiting time from the start to the end of the fanfare in the big hit gaming state, which is a predetermined time) is set as an initial value in the game control process timer. Then, “16” is set as an initial value in a round number counter provided in the RAM 102 for counting round games. Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a hit start designation command and a gaming state designation command (in this case, a command to designate the normal state) for designating the current gaming state, and the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. The special symbol stop process is terminated. Since the gaming state is changed after the big hit gaming state, it is not necessary to transmit a gaming state designation command here.

  When the big hit flag is in the off state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is in the on state. Is a waiting time until the execution of the production corresponding to the start of the hit gaming state is started, which is a predetermined time), and the special hit display result is “small hit” The transmission setting of the small hit start designation command (effect control command) which is a control command for designating the start of the gaming state is performed, and the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. On the other hand, when the small hit flag is in the off state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to end a special game state such as a probability change state or a time saving state. For example, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time reduction flag is in an on state. If the time reduction flag is in an on state, the CPU 103 subtracts “1” from the count value of the time reduction number counter. It is determined whether or not the count value after subtracting “1” is “0”. If the count value is “0”, the time-short end condition for ending the time-short state is satisfied (that is, Since a predetermined number of variable displays that can be executed in the state has been executed), the time reduction flag is turned off to end the time reduction state. After that, based on the current gaming state, a transmission setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command (in this case, a command for designating a highly accurate low base state) is performed, and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit release pre-processing, for example, 1 is subtracted from the timer value of the game control process timer. If the timer value after the subtraction is not “0”, the fanfare waiting time has not yet elapsed, so the big hit release pre-processing ends. When the timer value after subtraction is “0”, the fanfare waiting time has elapsed and the round game start timing has come. In this case, the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit gaming state and opening the grand prize opening (for example, the process of transmitting the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door), the big prize opening For example, processing for setting a timer value corresponding to the upper limit (29 seconds in this case) of the period for setting the game control process timer to the game control process timer is executed. When the process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. By repeating step S114 every time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting until the start timing of the round game (waiting until the end of the fanfare), opening of the big prize opening, and the like are realized.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This big hit release process includes a process for subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer, a timer value after 1 subtraction, and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 in one round game (switch Based on a counter (provided in the RAM 102, etc.) that counts 1 each time the count switch 23 is determined to be in the ON state in the process, etc. For example, a process for determining whether or not it is time to return to the partial release state).

  When it is determined that the timer value after subtraction of 1 has reached 0, or the number of detected game balls (count value of the counter) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 9), Since it is time to close, the process of returning the prize winning opening to the closed state (for example, the process of stopping transmitting the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning door and turning off the solenoid 82), Processing to set the timer value corresponding to the closing period of the big prize opening (a round game interval period, a preset period) in the game control process timer, processing to subtract the count value of the round number counter, etc. Executed. If the timer value after subtracting 1 does not become 0 and the number of detected game balls has not reached the predetermined number, a process for maintaining the open state of the big prize opening (for example, the solenoid drive signal Etc.), and the process during the big hit release is completed. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. By repeating step S115 every time a timer interrupt occurs, the open state of the big prize opening is maintained until the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In the processing after the big hit release, there are processing for determining whether or not the count value of the round number counter has become “0”, processing for decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 when it is not “0”, and the like. Done.

  If it is determined that the count value of the round number counter is “0”, it means that the round game has reached the upper limit number of times, so the ending waiting time (start of ending in the big hit gaming state) Is a waiting time until the end of the game, and a timer value corresponding to a predetermined time) is set in the game control process timer. In addition, a setting for transmitting a hit end designation command is performed, and processing for updating the special figure process flag to “7” is also performed.

  When the process of decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 is performed, it is determined whether the timer value after decrementing by 1 is 0. If not, it is not the start timing of the round game, so the closed state Is maintained, and the processing after the big hit release ends. If it is 0, it is the start timing of the round game, so the timer value corresponding to the upper limit (29 seconds in this case) of the process for opening the big winning opening and the period for opening the big winning opening. A process for setting the game control process timer is executed. When the process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S115 and S116 after the big winning opening is opened in step S114 every time a timer interrupt occurs.

  The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the big hit end process, a process of decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 is performed. If the timer value decremented by 1 is not 0, the ending has not ended, and the jackpot end processing is ended as it is. When the timer value decremented by 1 reaches 0, the ending ends, so depending on the big hit type (big hit type buffer setting value) stored in the big hit type buffer, the short time flag, short time counter, probability variation flag, etc. Set the state.

  For example, if the big hit type is “probability change”, the time reduction flag and the probability change flag are turned on, and “100” is set as a count initial value in the time reduction counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. If the big hit type is “non-probable change”, only the hour / hour flag is turned on, and “100” is set as the initial count value in the hour / hour counter. If the big hit type is “surprise”, only the probability variation flag is turned on. In the jackpot end processing, after such setting, a transmission setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command for designating a gaming state corresponding to the setting is performed, and various data such as a gaming control process timer and a jackpot type buffer setting value (next value) The display of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The small hit release pre-processing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit release pre-processing includes the fact that the variable display result is “small hit” and the timing for opening the big prize opening (for example, the small hit start start waiting time set above) And the like, and the process of starting the measurement of the elapsed time from the open state is included. In addition, in the small hit opening pre-processing, for example, the upper limit of the period for which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds” in the same manner as when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. ”Or the like is set to the small hit gaming state. When a process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”. By repeatedly executing step S118, the standby state is controlled until the special winning opening is opened.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. This small hit opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process of determining whether or not it is time to return the mouth from the open state to the closed state (or may be partially open), and the timing to return the grand prize opening from the open state to the closed state (of the game ball Processing for returning the special winning opening to the closed state when it is determined that the number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9) or the elapsed time reaches the upper limit period set in step S118) Etc. are included. And when returning the grand prize opening to the closed state, a process for determining whether or not the number of times of opening has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or a timing when the grand prize opening is returned to the closed state when the upper limit number is not reached A process for measuring the elapsed time from the time, a process for opening the special winning opening again when the measured elapsed time reaches a preset time, and the like are executed. When the number of times of opening the big winning opening reaches the upper limit number, a setting is made to transmit a small hit end designation command which is a control command for notifying that the small hit gaming state has ended, and the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. Is updated. The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the above-described command control process after the special symbol process is completed. Step S118 is repeatedly executed, and step S119 is repeatedly executed to realize the small hit gaming state.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, there is a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the presentation operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by the presentation device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. This includes a process of waiting until it elapses (ending the small hit end process until the waiting time elapses). Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. When the production control main process is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process, clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer mounted on the production control board 12). Circuit) register setting, etc. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a timer interrupt flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122 is turned on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example, based on the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is, for example, an interruption that occurs when an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis processing, for example, after the various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer are read, the read effect control commands are read out. Settings and control corresponding to are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process is executed. In the effect control process, for example, various operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, and the like. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed. Subsequent to the effect control process, an effect random number update process is performed, and numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter in the RAM 122 is updated by software as various random values used for effect control. Thereafter, it is determined again whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning command (start winning prize designation command, special figure reserved memory number designation command, symbol determination result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command) from the main board 11. It is determined whether there has been (step S401).

  When it is determined that the start winning command is received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S402). When a first start winning port designation command or a first special figure reserved memory number designation command is received as a start winning command, a start winning command (first start winning mouth designation command, first special figure reserved memory number designation command) , Symbol determination result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command) are stored in a first start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. When a second start winning port designation command or a second special figure reserved memory number designation command is received as a start winning command, a start winning command (second start winning mouth designation command, second special figure reserved memory number designation command) , Symbol determination result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command) is stored in a second start winning command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122.

  FIG. 15A is a configuration example of the first start winning command buffer. In the first start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the start winning reception command received at the first start winning is stored. The first start winning command buffer stores storage areas (corresponding to each of the hold display numbers 1 to 4) that can store various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the first special figure hold memory number Area) is provided.

  When there is a start prize at the first start prize opening, four commands of a first start prize opening designation command, a first special figure hold storage designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern judgment result designation command are set to 1 The set effect control command (start winning prize command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition to the first start prize opening designation command, the first special figure hold memory designation command, the symbol determination result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command, other information is held in the first start prize command buffer. A storage area is secured so that the information can be stored in association with the stored information.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores data for specifying the start winning command from the top of the empty area of the first start winning command buffer in accordance with the receiving order. The empty area of the first start winning command buffer, that is, the data in the area where no data is stored is “0000 (H)”. Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the smallest hold display number in which the start winning command storage area is all “0000 (H)” in the first start winning command buffer. The effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the first start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol determination result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

  The first start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each hold display number, and a storage area for storing a corresponding display change pattern to be described later. . The corresponding display change pattern is a type indicating a change (transition) in the display mode (display color) of the hold display and the active display. As shown in FIG. 15A, when the corresponding display change pattern is “0”, the hold notice effect is not executed, so the display mode (display color) of the hold display and the active display is the normal mode (white). It will not change. In addition, the first start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the hold display numbers and a storage area for storing an effect pattern to be described later. The action effect pattern is a pattern of the effect mode effect mode that is executed before the display mode of the corresponding display such as the hold display and the active display is changed when the hold notice effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 15A, when the action effect pattern is “0”, the action effects other than the effect effect of the gusset are not executed.

  FIG. 15B is a configuration example of the second start winning command buffer. In the second start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the start winning reception command received at the second start winning is stored. The second start winning command buffer has a storage area (corresponding to each of the hold display numbers 1 to 4) in which various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the second special figure hold memory number can be stored. Area) is provided.

  When there is a start prize at the second start prize opening, four commands of a second start prize designation command, a second special figure hold storage designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern judgment result designation command are set to 1 The set effect control command (start winning prize command) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second start winning prize command buffer holds other information in addition to the second starting prize opening designation command, the second special figure hold memory designation command, the symbol determination result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command. A storage area is secured so that the information can be stored in association with the stored information.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores data for specifying the start winning command from the top of the empty area of the second start winning command buffer in accordance with the receiving order. The empty area of the second start winning command buffer, that is, the data in the area where no data is stored is “0000 (H)”. Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the smallest hold display number in which the start winning command storage area is all “0000 (H)” in the second start winning command buffer. The effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the second start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol determination result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

  Similarly to the first start winning command buffer, the second start winning command buffer has a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each hold display number, and a corresponding display change pattern to be described later. A storage area for storing is provided. The display change pattern corresponding to the hold display number “4” shown in FIG. 15B stores “PT4-XX”, and the hold notice effect for the hold display corresponding to the hold display number “4”. Indicates that it will be executed. The second start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area for storing the action effect pattern.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 14, after executing step S402 or when determining that the start winning command is not received (step S401; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the game It is determined whether or not a state designation command has been received (step S403). When it is determined that the gaming state designation command has been received (step S403; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 switches the on / off state of the high-accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the contents of the received gaming state designation command. (Step S404).

  The high-accuracy flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122, and is turned on in response to the probability-changing state. Corresponding to the switching of the on state / off state, the on state / off state is switched. The high base flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122, and is turned on in response to the short time state. Corresponding to the switching of the on state / off state, the on state / off state is switched. For example, when the game state designation command designates the high-accuracy high-base state (for example, designates that the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are on), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the high-probability flag and the high Both base flags are turned on (if the flag is already on, the on state is maintained. Hereinafter, the on state / off state for both flags are the same). When the gaming state designation command specifies the high probability low base state (for example, when the probability variation flag is on and the time reduction flag is off), the high probability flag is turned on and high base Turn off the flag. When the gaming state designation command specifies the low probability low base state (normal state) (for example, when specifying that the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off), both the high probability flag and the high base flag are used. Turn off.

  After executing step S404, or when determining that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and the command analysis processing Exit.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the process performed in response to the reception of each effect control command in the command analysis process will be described. The content shown in the item “processing content” shown in FIG. 16 is, for example, the processing executed in step S405. Further, the step number indicated in the item “processing content” indicates the step number in the flowchart shown in FIG. 14 and means that the corresponding step processing is executed. In addition, each reception flag and each storage area indicated in the item “processing content” are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Setting the reception flag means turning on.

  For example, when the received effect control command is a variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets a variation pattern command reception flag.

  For example, if the received effect control command is a display result designation command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold display setting process (step S161).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hold display setting process. When the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 18 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning command has been received (step S501). When it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step S501; Yes), the production control CPU 120 receives the first reserved memory number addition designation command received in the low base state, or the high It is determined whether it is any of the second reserved memory number addition designation commands received in the base state (step S502). In this mode, by executing the processing of step S502, the hold notice effect can be executed when the hold memory increases based on the winning to the first start winning opening 13 in the low base state, and in the high base state. The hold notice effect can be executed when the hold memory increases based on the winning at the second start winning opening 14. In this embodiment, for example, when the hold notice effect is already being executed, it is determined to be No in S502 so that the hold notice effect is not executed.

  When it is determined that it is either the first start winning opening designation command received in the low base state or the second starting winning opening designation command received in the high base state (step S502; Yes), the CPU 120 for effect control Determines whether or not the number of holds (first special figure reserved memory number or second special figure reserved memory number) has become 3 or more due to the current winning (step S503). In step S503, it is determined whether or not the first special figure hold memory number is 3 or more in the low base state, and whether or not the second special figure hold memory number is 3 or more in the high base state. Good. It should be noted that the number of reserves is the first special figure reserved memory number designation command when the first start winning prize designation command is received in step S502, and the second number when the second start prize designation designation command is received. It may be specified by referring to the 2 special figure reserved memory number designation command.

  When it is determined that the number of holds is 3 or more (step S503; Yes), the production control CPU 120 determines the final display mode (final display mode) of the corresponding display such as the hold display and the active display, and the final display mode. A corresponding display change pattern that is an effect of changing the display mode of the corresponding display step by step (holding notice effect) is determined (step S504). That is, in this embodiment, when the number of holds is 3 or more, the hold notice effect is executed. In step S504, a pattern that does not change the display mode of the corresponding display is determined, and when the number of holds is 3 or more, the hold notice effect may not be executed. Even when the second reserved memory count addition designation command received in the high base state is received, the high base state (short time state) ends before the target changes and becomes the low base state. May not execute the hold notice effect.

  Even when the number of holds is less than 3, the hold notice effect may be made executable. In addition, a plurality of hold notice effects may be executed in parallel.

  Further, in this embodiment, a notice effect (hold notice effect) in which the display mode of the hold display and the active display is changed is executed, but only when the hold display or the active display is performed. The notice effect that the display mode changes may be executed. And this invention may be applied in such a notice effect.

  In step S504, first, the final display mode of the correspondence display is determined. For example, referring to the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19 stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 according to the variable display result and the variable pattern of the variable display, the corresponding display (active display) at the determination ratio shown in FIG. ) To determine the final display mode. The effect control CPU 120 may obtain the variable display variable display result and the variation pattern with reference to the symbol determination result designation command and the variation pattern determination result designation command included in the start winning prize command.

  Next, determination of the final display stage of the hold display will be specifically described. The final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19 is a table for determining in advance the final display mode (final display mode) of the corresponding display change (transition) in the hold notice effect. As shown in FIG. 19, the final display mode determination table sets the final display mode (display color) to “white”, “blue”, “green”, “green” for each variable display result (including jackpot type and variation pattern). A determination ratio for determining either “red” or “rainbow” is assigned. More specifically, the variable display result is divided into “big hit (16R)”, “big hit (surprise)”, “losing (super reach)”, and “other than the above”, and each is prepared as a final display mode. Different determination ratios are assigned to “white”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow”.

  “White” in FIG. 19 is a display mode (normal mode) when the hold notice effect is not executed. That is, in FIG. 19, when the final display mode is determined to be “white”, the hold notice effect is not executed (the display mode of the corresponding display does not change). “Blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow” in FIG. 19 are display modes (notice modes) when the hold notice effect is executed. Note that the timing at which the display mode changes is the timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the hold display was shifted and the hold display was shifted (after the change started), or after the hold display was shifted to the active display. It is the timing when a predetermined time has passed. Note that the timing at which the display mode changes is not limited to these, and may be any timing during the change or at the end of the change. For example, as the change timing, at the start of change, before each decorative symbol is stopped (during high-speed fluctuation), when each decorative symbol is stopped, reach, and at the time of development to super reach (multiple during hold display and active display) ), During the reach of Super Reach, etc. In addition, it may be changed corresponding to the operation means such as the push button 31B being operated, or in the case of a pseudo-series variation pattern, it changes during each re-variation or during each re-variation of the pseudo-series. It is good also as timing.

  In the hold notice effect, the ratio of big hits in the order of “rainbow”> “red”> “green”> “blue” (big hit reliability) and the percentage of super reach (super reach reliability) are high, and the big hit The degree of advantage is also high. In addition, when the display mode is “rainbow”, it is determined that 16R big hit will be made. In this embodiment, the display color of the display mode of the corresponding display is changed in the hold notice effect, but the shape, size, pattern, etc. may be changed.

  In addition, when the display mode is “rainbow”, it is determined that it will be a big hit, but it may not be decided that it will be a big hit. Further, the big hit including the accuracy may be determined. The determination ratio of the final display mode may be arbitrary as long as it can be notified that the display mode is likely to be advantageous to the player.

  After determining the final display mode with reference to the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19 in step S504, the specific display mode in the hold notice effect is determined based on the determined final display mode and the number of holds. A corresponding display change pattern corresponding to the change is determined. Specifically, a corresponding display change pattern determination table for determining the corresponding display change pattern is selected in accordance with the determined final display mode and the number of pending. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, nine types of corresponding display change pattern determination tables 1 to 9 corresponding to the final display mode and the number of holds are prepared. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of corresponding display change patterns in which change timing and change stage (intermediate display mode) are set in advance so as to finally change to the final display mode are provided. It is determined to be one of a plurality of types of corresponding display change patterns.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a corresponding display change pattern determination table 7 that is selected when the final display mode is “red” and the number of holds is “4” as an example of the corresponding display change pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 21, in the corresponding display change pattern determination table 7, a plurality of types in which the display mode (display mode) in the winning display, the hold display number 3, the hold display number 2, the hold display number 1 and the active display are respectively determined. The corresponding display change pattern is set. At the time of winning a prize, the display mode corresponding to the corresponding display change pattern is displayed, and when the display mode becomes different from each hold display number and the active display, the display mode changes to the display mode corresponding to the corresponding display change pattern. .

  For example, in the corresponding display change pattern PT4-4-1 in the corresponding display change pattern determination table 7, the hold display is displayed as “white” at the time of winning, and the corresponding display change pattern changes to “red” when shifted to the active display. It is. In the corresponding display change pattern PT4-4-21, the hold display is displayed in “blue” when winning, changes to “green” when shifted to the hold display number 1, and changes to “red” when shifted to the active display. It is a corresponding display change pattern which changes. What is necessary is just to determine in any of such a several types of corresponding | compatible display change pattern. In FIG. 21, the determination ratio is not shown, but it may be determined at random, for example, the corresponding display change pattern may be determined based on the variable display result. For example, various reliability levels (big hit reliability, reach reliability, and big hit advantage) may be different depending on the number of changes and the change timing. By doing so, the player pays attention not only to the final display mode, but also to the number of changes and the change timing. The determined corresponding display change pattern is stored in the corresponding location in the start winning command buffer shown in FIG.

  In the corresponding display change pattern determination table 7 shown in FIG. 21, the number of changes is indicated for each corresponding display change pattern. An action effect pattern, which will be described later, is determined according to the number of changes.

  Here, only the corresponding display change pattern determination table 7 is shown, but in the other corresponding display change pattern determination tables, a plurality of types of corresponding display patterns are set and any one of them can be determined. Good. As shown in FIG. 20, the corresponding display change pattern determination table 1 is a table that is selected when the final display mode is “white”. Therefore, it remains “white” from winning to active display. Only the corresponding display change pattern is set.

  After determining the final display mode and the corresponding display change pattern in step S504, the action effect pattern is determined (step S505). In this embodiment, when the hold notice effect is executed, the effect image (action effect image) is moved with respect to the hold display after being shifted and displayed with the digestion of the hold memory. The effect effect in which the effect image acts (interferes) is executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the display mode may change as a result of the effect. By doing so, the player pays attention to the action effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In this embodiment, action effects A and action effects B are executed as action effects. When the action effect B is executed, the display state of the hold display is surely changed, and when the action effect A is executed, the hold display may not be changed. In other words, the action effect A (action effect A gaset) that only gives the player's expectation can be executed. In this embodiment, the action effect A is an effect in which the bomb image acts on the hold display or the active display, and the action effect B is an effect in which the arrow image acts on the hold display or the active display. In addition, the effect aspect of an effect effect is not limited to this, You may be arbitrary effect aspects. The action effect A gaze is also referred to as a suggestion effect that suggests that the corresponding display changes to a display mode at a higher expectation level.

  In this embodiment, when the action effect B is executed, the display mode of the hold display is surely changed. However, the display mode of the hold display may not change with a low probability. (There may be an action effect B gas). For example, the display mode of the hold display may be changed with higher probability when the action effect B is executed than when the action effect A is executed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, a plurality of types of action effect patterns corresponding to which action effect is executed at each stage (holding display number, active display) according to the number of changes in the corresponding display. Is provided. As shown in FIG. 22, according to the number of changes, 14 types of action effect patterns in which action effect A and action effect B are combined are provided. In step S505, any action effect pattern may be determined according to the number of changes in the corresponding display change pattern determined in step S504. For example, in step S504, when the action effect pattern PT4-4-1 shown in FIG. 21 is determined, the number of changes is one, so that the action effect pattern STP1-1 or STP1-2 is determined. When the action effect pattern PT4-4-21 shown in FIG. 21 is determined, since the number of changes is two, the action effect patterns STP2-1 to STP2-4 are determined. When the action effect pattern PT4-4-41 shown in FIG. 21 is determined, since the number of changes is three, it is determined as one of the action effect patterns STP3-1 to STP3-8. The determined action effect pattern is stored in a corresponding location or the like in the start winning command buffer.

  In FIG. 22, the determination ratio is not shown, but it may be determined at random, for example, the action effect pattern may be determined based on the variable display result. For example, depending on the number of appearances of the action effect A or the action effect B, various reliability levels (big hit reliability, reach reliability, and big hit advantage) may be different. By doing so, the player pays attention not only to the final display mode but also to which action effect is executed.

  Moreover, you may vary the determination ratio of an effect production pattern according to the determined corresponding | compatible display change pattern. For example, even if the number of changes and the final display mode are the same and the corresponding display change pattern, the action effect determination ratio may be varied depending on the number of change stages. Specifically, if the pattern changes from “white → white → green → green → red”, the first change changes in two steps and the next change changes in one step. The action effect pattern to be effect A is easily determined. Further, if the pattern changes from “white → blue → blue → red → red”, the first change changes in one step and the next change changes in two steps. The action effect pattern may be easily determined (or the action effect A and the action effect B may be reversed). By doing in this way, according to the type of action effect, it is possible to vary the rate of change in multiple stages, the player will pay attention to which action effect is executed, and the interest of the game improves.

  In the action effect pattern shown in FIG. 22, the number of executions of the action effect B is shown in each action effect pattern. In this embodiment, an effect corresponding to the remaining number of times of the effect effect B is executed. Details will be described later.

  In this embodiment, the action effect is executed at least for the number of changes of the corresponding display. In other words, the action effect is always executed when the display mode of the corresponding display changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be a case where the display mode of the corresponding display changes without accompanying the effect.

  Returning to the description of the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 18, in the process of step S502, the first start winning port designation command received in the low base state and the second start winning port designation command received in the high base state. When it is determined that neither of them is determined (step S502; No), when it is determined that the number of holds is less than 3 in step S503 (step S503; No), the hold notice effect is not executed. A corresponding display change pattern that remains “white” is determined (step S506). Here, “0” corresponding to not executing the hold notice effect is stored in the corresponding place in the start winning command buffer shown in FIG.

  After executing the process of step S505 or S506, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the first hold display part of the display screen of the image display device 5 according to the corresponding display change pattern determined in the process of step S505 or step S506. The correspondence display (first hold display or second hold display) is additionally displayed on 5HL or the second hold display section 5HR (step S509).

  After performing the process of step S509, or when it is determined in the process of step S501 that the start winning command has not been received (step S501; No), the effect control CPU 120 has received the change start designation command or not. Is determined (step S510). Whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the variation start designation command by referring to whether or not either the first variation start designation command reception flag or the second variation start designation command reception flag is set, for example. What is necessary is just to determine. When it is determined that the change start designation command has not been received (step S510; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the hold display setting process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start designation command has been received (step S510; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step S512). . When it is determined that the received variation start designation command is not the second variation start designation command, that is, the received variation start designation command is the first variation start designation command (step S512; No), the first change of the image display device 5 is performed. In the 1 hold display portion 5HL, the hold display of the hold display number of the hold display number “1” is erased and displayed as an active display on the variable display corresponding display portion AHA, and each display corresponding to “2” to “4” is displayed. The display position of one hold display is moved (shifted) to the right one by one (step S513).

  After executing the processing of step S513, the CPU 120 for effect control erases the stored content of the hold display number “0” (active display) in the first start winning command buffer and holds the hold display numbers “1” to “4”. Is shifted one by one (step S514). After executing the process of step S514, the hold display setting process is terminated.

  In the process of step S512, when it is determined that the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step S512; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 uses the second hold display unit 5HR of the image display device 5 to The hold display number of the hold display number “1” is erased and displayed on the variable display corresponding display section AHA as an active display, and the display position of each second hold display corresponding to “2” to “4” is displayed. Move (shift) leftward one by one (step S518).

  After executing the process of step S518, the CPU 120 for effect control erases the stored contents of the hold display number “0” (active display) in the second start winning command buffer and holds the hold display numbers “1” to “4”. "1" is shifted one by one (step S519). After executing the process of step S519, the hold display setting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart of the effect control process shown in FIG. 17, after executing the hold display setting process in step S <b> 161, the effect control CPU 120 provides an effect provided in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122. Depending on the value of the process flag (initially “0”), one of the following processes in steps S170 to S177 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. The variable display start waiting process starts variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command from the main board 11 is received. It includes a process for determining whether or not to do so. When the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is received and it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbols on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”. Is done.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 5 In order to perform various display operations and other various presentation operations, it includes a process of determining a definite decorative pattern and various presentation control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, and the like. The variable display start setting process ends when the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122, and the effect control determined in step S171. Various control data is read out from the pattern, and various effects control is performed during the variable display of the decorative design.

  The variable display stop process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The variable display stop process includes a process of determining whether the variable display result notified by the display result designation command is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. When the variable display result is “big hit” or “small win”, the value of the production process flag is updated to “4”, while when the variable display result is “lost”, the production The process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

  The waiting process per special figure in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received, the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, and the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command received before that is “probable change”. Or, if it is “non-probable change”, the value of the production process flag is updated to “6”. If the hit start specifying command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, or the hit start specifying command specifies the start of the big hit gaming state, the display result specifying command received before that If the big hit type identified by is “surprise”, the value of the production process flag is updated to “5”. Further, when the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command (when the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed), it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”. Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value.

  The special winning opening short-term opening process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this big winning opening short-term opening process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the “surprise” big hit game state or the small hit game state, and the effect image based on the set content Is displayed on the display area of the image display device 5, voice and sound effects are output from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and a command (electricity) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the “surprise” big hit game state or small hit game state, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decoration LED by the output of the decoration signal) Is also included, for example, effect control informing the image display device 5). In addition, the process at the time of short-opening of the big prize opening is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag in response to receiving the big hit end specifying command or the small hit end specifying command from the main board 11 To "7".

  The special winning opening normal opening process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the special winning opening normal opening process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot gaming state of “probability change” or “non-probability change”, and the effect image based on the setting content Is displayed on the display area of the image display device 5, voice and sound effects are output from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and a command (electricity) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the jackpot gaming state of “probability change” or “non-probability change” such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output of the decoration signal) , Including the effect control notified in the image display device 5). Further, in the special winning opening normal opening process, the value of the effect control process flag is set to “7”, which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, in response to receiving the jackpot end designation command from the main board 11, for example. Update.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents in the display area of the image display device 5. Display the sound, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and game effect is output by outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect controls such as turning on / off / flashing the lamp 9 and the decoration LED are executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  Next, details of the effect in this embodiment will be described. As described above, in this embodiment, the effect effect A and the effect effect B can be executed. The action effect A is an effect in which the image of the bomb acts on the corresponding display. The action effect A includes an action effect A gas that does not change the hold display.

  On the other hand, in the action effect B, after the arrow image corresponding to the action effect B is once displayed on the image display device 5, the arrow image is changed to the corresponding display until the corresponding display of the notice target is deleted. It is an effect that acts. That is, when the image of the arrow is displayed on the image display device 5, the execution of the action effect B is stocked. Thus, the effect (displaying an arrow image) that stocks (implies) the execution of the effect effect B is also referred to as a notification effect that informs that the effect effect B will be executed in the future. Further, a plurality of action effects B can be stocked. In other words, a plurality of arrow images may be displayed. When the action effect B is executed, the on-hold display always changes, so that the player can change the minimum number of times the corresponding display changes depending on the number of arrow images being stocked (displayed). It is possible to grasp the stage of change (display mode). For example, when the current display color of the corresponding display is “blue” and two arrow images are stocked, it can be recognized that at least the action effect B is executed, and the change is at least two steps. Can be understood to be "red". By executing such action effects B and notification effects, the player comes to pay attention to these effects, and the interest is improved.

  Thus, in this embodiment, in one corresponding display (one hold notice effect), since a plurality of notification effects can be executed (action effect B is a plurality of stocks), depending on the number of notification effects, It becomes possible to recognize to what level the corresponding display changes, and the interest of the game is improved. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the display mode of the correspondence display may change in a plurality of stages. That is, there is a case where a plurality of stages are changed corresponding to one action effect and one notification effect. As a result, the player expects to change more stages in response to one action effect and one notification effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Note that the notification effects may be executed one by one, or the correspondence display may be changed step by step.

  In addition, the effect mode (displayed image) of the effect effect A and the effect effect B is an example, the effect effect A is an effect effect with a gaze effect, and the effect effect B is an effect effect with a notification effect. Good. Further, the effect mode of the effect (notification effect) that stocks the effect effect B is an example, and any effect that can indicate that the effect effect B is stocked may be used.

  In the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. 17, the effect presentation setting process for determining whether to execute the notification effect and whether or not to perform the action effect A gaze is executed. FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect production setting process. In the action effect setting process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first refers to the corresponding display change pattern stored in the start winning command buffer (first start winning command buffer or second start winning command buffer). By doing so, it is determined whether or not the corresponding display changes in this variation (whether an action effect that is not a frustration is executed) (step S601).

  If the corresponding display changes in the current variation (step S601; Yes), whether or not to perform the operational effect B in the current variation by referring to the operational effect pattern stored in the start winning command buffer. Is determined (step S602). When the action effect B is executed in the current variation (step S602; Yes), it is determined whether or not the stock number of the action effect B specified by the stock number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is zero. (Step S603).

  In spite of execution of the action effect B in the current variation, if the number of stocks of the action effect B is 0 (step S603; Yes), the effect is inconsistent. Is determined to be stocked (the notification effect of stocking one arrow is executed) (step S604). In this case, the effect presentation B is stocked in the current variation, and the stocked action presentation B is executed.

  If the corresponding display does not change in the current variation (step S601; No), whether or not the action effect A gaze is executed is determined (step S605). FIG. 24 shows an example of the determination ratio in step S605. As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, whether or not the corresponding display changes in the future including the current change, which is the current display mode, and the current number of stocks of the effect effect B Accordingly, it is determined whether or not the action effect A gas is executed at a different rate.

  In particular, when there is a future change schedule, and the current display mode is the same, when the current stock number is large, it is easy to determine that the action effect A gaze is executed at a higher rate than when it is small. It has become. If there is a large number of stocks of action effects B, the action effects are further executed, and the expectation level is increased when the effect effects are executed, except when the number of stocks changes to the highest “rainbow”. Players expect to improve. Therefore, in this embodiment, as the current number of stocks of action effects B (the number of notification effects) increases, the execution frequency of the action effects A gaze (suggest effects) is improved, thereby increasing the player's expectation. It can be used effectively and can improve the fun of the game. It should be noted that, regardless of the current number of stocks of action effects B (number of notification effects), the execution frequency of action effects A gaze (suggest effects) is improved as compared to the case where the notification effects are not being executed. You may make it make it. By doing in this way, the same effect can be produced.

  When there is no plan to change the corresponding display in the future, the number of stocks is inevitably 0, but the execution ratio of the action effect A gaze is low. In particular, when the current display mode is “rainbow” at the highest level, the action effect A gaze is restricted from being executed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect of a gasse is performed in the situation where a corresponding display does not change any more, and it can prevent that a useless effect is performed and an interest falls. In this embodiment, when the current display mode is “rainbow” at the highest level, the action effect A gaze is not always executed, but it is limited to be executed with a low probability. May be.

  It should be noted that if the highest stage of the hold notice effect is not confirmed as a big hit, an effect such as the action effect A Gase may be executed. In this case, it is only necessary to show that the degree of expectation is higher when the hold notice effect is at the highest stage and when the effect of the frustration is executed.

  Further, even when there is no plan to change the corresponding display in the future, the action effect A gaze is executed in the case of the “blue” to “red” stage than in the case where the current display mode is “white”. The ratio is high. By doing in this way, a player's sense of expectation can be raised effectively.

  When there is a plan to change the corresponding display in the future, it is easier to determine that the action effect A gaze is executed as the stage of the current display mode is higher. Since the higher the level of the current display mode is, the more the player and the higher the level that the player wants to change, the higher the level of determination, the more effective the player's expectation can be.

  In step S605, it is only necessary to determine whether or not to perform the action effect A gaze at the above-described determination ratio. The determination result may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (start winning prize command buffer or the like). Note that the determination ratio shown in FIG. 24 is an example, and can be arbitrarily changed without departing from the gist of the present invention.

  When the action effect B is not executed in the current fluctuation (step S602; No), when the action effect B is executed in the current fluctuation, and the stock number of the action effect B is not 0 (step S603; No), or After executing the process of step S605, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the number of stocks of the effect effect B (the number of notification effects, the number of arrows in the notification effect) (step S606).

  FIG. 25 shows an example of the stock number determination ratio in step S606. As shown in FIG. 25, in step S606, the current stock number (the number of notification effects) is determined according to the remaining number of executions of the effect effect B. Note that the determination ratio of the number of stocks is an example, and the degree of advantage (such as big hit reliability) may be different depending on the number of stocks per time.

  After the process of step S604 or S606 is executed, the determination result is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (command buffer at the start winning prize etc.). Further, the value of the stock number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is updated (step S607). When the process of step S604 is executed, the value of the stock number counter is incremented by 1. When the process of step S606 is executed, the value of the stock number counter may be updated based on the determination result in step S606. . Thereafter, the effect production setting process ends.

  It should be noted that the number of notification effects executed and whether or not the action effect A gaze is executed are determined for each change in this way, but when determining the corresponding display change pattern (when winning) For example, it may be determined in advance whether the number of executions of the notification effect, the execution timing, or the action effect A gaze is executed. Also, preparing a corresponding display change pattern in which the number of notification effects executed, execution timing, presence / absence of action effect A, and which action effect is to be executed are prepared in advance, and the corresponding display change pattern is determined. Thus, not only the manner of changing the corresponding display, but also a series of effect forms of action effect and notification effect may be determined.

  In the variable display effect setting process in step S172 in FIG. 17, an effect effect execution process is executed for executing a change in the display manner of the notification effect, the effect effect, and the corresponding display (pending notice effect). FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect production execution process. In the action effect execution process shown in FIG. 26, first, the effect control CPU 120 executes stock of the action effect B (notification effect) in the current fluctuation, and whether or not it is the execution timing of the notification effect. Is determined (step S701). In this embodiment, the notification effect is executed at a timing immediately after the start of change (for example, 1 second after the start of change). Therefore, in step S701, it is only necessary to determine whether or not it is determined to execute the notification effect in steps S604 and S606 of FIG. 23 and whether or not it is 1 second after the start of variation.

  In addition, the execution timing of the notification effect is not limited to this, and may be an arbitrary timing during the change or at the end of the change. For example, the notification performance execution timing is as follows: at the start of fluctuation, before each decorative symbol is stopped (during high-speed fluctuation), when each decorative symbol is stopped, when reaching reach, at the time of development to super reach (hold display or active display) A plurality of timings), a super-reach reach production, or the like. Further, it may be executed in response to an operation of the operating means such as the push button 31B. If the fluctuation pattern is a pseudo-continuous pattern, it is executed during each re-variation or during each re-variation of the pseudo-series. It is good also as timing.

  When the stock of the effect effect B (notification effect) is executed and when it is the execution timing of the notification effect (step S701; Yes), the stock of the effect effect B (notification effect) is executed (step S702). Specifically, an arrow image is displayed on the image display device 5.

  In the case where the stock (notification effect) of the effect effect B is not executed, when the notification effect is not executed (step S701; No), or after the process of step S702 is executed, the effect effect is executed. It is determined whether or not it is the execution timing (step S703). The effect effect here includes an effect effect of gas. That is, it is determined here whether or not it is the execution timing of the action effect A, the action effect B, or the action effect A gaze. In this embodiment, the timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the corresponding display shifts (after the fluctuation starts) is the display mode change timing. Accordingly, the action effect is executed at a specific timing before that (for example, 4 seconds from the start of fluctuation). In step S703, it may be determined whether it is the execution timing of the action effect by determining whether it is 4 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. When it is neither the execution timing nor the execution timing (step S703; No), the operation effect execution process is terminated.

  When the action effect is to be executed and it is the execution timing (step S703; Yes), the corresponding action effect is executed (step S704).

  If the executed effect effect is the effect effect B (step S705; Yes), the value of the stock number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is decremented by 1 (step S706). At this time, the action effect image used in the action effect B is deleted from the image display device 5 (an arrow image is reduced by one).

  When the executed effect is other than the effect B (step S; No), after the process of step S706, the corresponding display is changed or maintained according to the corresponding display change pattern (step S707). Thereby, the display mode of the corresponding display is changed or maintained as a result of the effect. Thereafter, the effect production execution process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, an example of an effect image when the hold notice effect and the effect effect are executed will be described.

  FIG. 27A shows the image display device 5 in which variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. An active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The first hold display section 5HL displays first hold displays H1 to H4 corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4”. The hold displays H1 to H3 are displayed in a “white” circle which is a normal mode, and the hold displays H4 are displayed in a “blue” circle which is a notice mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27B, the lost symbols are derived and displayed as variable display results in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  When the next variable display is started, if it is determined in step S606 in FIG. 23 that one action effect B is to be stocked (notification effect for stocking one arrow is to be executed), FIG. As shown in C), an arrow effect image SB1 is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, it can be seen that the hold display H3 displayed in “blue” in the notice mode changes to at least “green”. The action effect image SB1 of the arrow continues to be displayed until the action effect B is executed. In addition, in order to make it easy to understand that the action effect image SB1 of the arrow is stocked, a display area for the action effect image may be provided or the action effect image may be surrounded by a frame.

  If it is determined in step S605 of FIG. 23 that the action effect A gaze is to be executed, as shown in FIG. 27D, an action effect in which the bomb action effect image SA1 acts on the hold display H3 is executed. Is done. Since this effect is an effect of gas, the display mode of the hold display H3 does not change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27E, the lost symbols are derived and displayed as variable display results in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  Further, when it is determined that one action effect B is to be stocked (that is, a notification effect of stocking one arrow is to be executed), as shown in FIG. 27F, an arrow effect effect image SB2 is displayed as an image. It is displayed on the display device 5. At this point in time, two action effects B are stocked, and it can be seen that the hold display H2 displayed in “blue” in the notice mode changes to “red” at least two stages above.

  In addition, in this display example, it is determined to the corresponding display change pattern PT4-4-21 shown in FIG. 21 that changes the display mode at the time of the active display and the action display B is executed twice. Suppose that it is decided to do.

  As shown in FIG. 27G, during the variable display when the hold display of the notice mode becomes the hold display number 1, the action effect B in which the arrow action effect image SB1 acts on the hold display H1 is executed. As shown in FIG. 27H, the display mode changes to “green”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28A, the lost symbols are derived and displayed as variable display results in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  Subsequently, when variable display of the notice target is started, as shown in FIG. 28 (B), the action effect B in which the action effect image SB2 of the arrow acts on the active display AH is executed, and FIG. As shown, the display mode changes to “red”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28D, for example, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

(Modification)
In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, A various deformation | transformation and application are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and the one described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. The structure of the part may be provided. Further, at least some of the following modifications may be combined.

  In the above embodiment, in the case of executing the hold notice effect in step S504 of FIG. 18, after determining the final display mode based on the table shown in FIG. 19, the corresponding display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. The overall display contents of the pending notice effect are determined by determining the corresponding display change pattern in which the display mode and the change timing of the corresponding display in each variable display are associated with each other. The method for determining the content of the holding notice effect is not limited to this, and any determination method may be used. For example, in step S504 in FIG. 18, only the presence / absence of the hold notice effect and the final display mode are determined, and each effect effect is executed whether or not the effect effect is executed every time variable display is executed. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the corresponding display is changed as a result of the action effect. In this case, what is necessary is just to perform an effect (change of a display mode) so that a book end may meet with respect to the determined final display mode.

  Also, in step S504 in FIG. 18, the display mode at the time of winning and the final display mode are determined, and in each variable display until the variable display of the notice target is executed, the display mode is changed or changes when changing The number of stages may be determined based on a level difference (stage difference) between the display mode at the time of winning and the final display mode. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the change pattern determination process executed in step S504 of FIG. 18 in such a case. In this modification, the hold notice effect is also referred to as a predetermined effect. In the change pattern determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a display mode and a final display mode at the time of winning the corresponding display (step S801). In step S801, for example, according to the variable display result and variation pattern of variable display, for example, with reference to the winning and final display mode determination table shown in FIG. A display mode and a final display mode are determined. The table shown in FIG. 33 is a table when the variable display result is a big hit (16R). In addition to this, a table for big hits (accuracy), super reach lose, other loses, etc. is also prepared. The numerical value in FIG. 33 indicates the determination ratio (%). For example, the determination ratio of “white” at the time of winning and the final display mode “rainbow” is 3%.

  Subsequently, based on the level difference from the final display mode, the number of change steps in each hold display number is determined (step S802). For example, when the number of holds becomes 4 at the time of winning a prize, the number of change stages at the timing of 4 times when the hold display number 3, hold display number 2, hold display number 1, and active display are determined.

  In step S802, the number of change steps at each timing is determined with reference to the change step number determination table shown in FIG. Here, the level difference is 1 for “white” and “blue”, 2 for “white” and “green”, 3 for “white” and “red”, and 4 for “white” and “rainbow”. For example, when the number of holds at the time of winning becomes 4, when the display mode at the time of winning is “white” and the final display mode is “rainbow”, first, the level difference 4 and the hold display number 3 in FIG. Referring to the determination ratio, the number of change stages when the hold display number 3 is obtained is determined. Subsequently, with reference to the level difference between the display mode and the final display mode (“rainbow”) in the hold display number 3 and the determination ratio of the hold display number 2, the number of change stages when the hold display number 2 is reached is determined. . Similarly, with reference to the level difference between the display mode and the final display mode (“rainbow”) in the hold display number 2 and the determination ratio of the hold display number 1, the number of change stages when the hold display number 1 is reached is determined. Referring to the level difference between the display mode and the final display mode (“rainbow”) in the hold display number 1 and the active display determination ratio, the number of change stages when the active display is set is determined.

  As described above, since the change stage at each timing is determined based on the level difference from the final display mode, it is not necessary to provide a corresponding display change pattern in advance or to provide a plurality of tables for determining it. Capacity can be reduced and processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, after determining the winning display mode, the final display mode, and the number of change stages at each timing, the series of determination results is stored (step S803). Thereafter, the change pattern determination process ends.

  In the process of step S172 of FIG. 17, the hold notice effect is executed based on the winning display mode, the final display mode, and the change stage in each timing determined in this way.

  Note that the processing in step S802 in FIG. 32 may be executed at the start of each change. That is, the winning display mode and the final display mode may be determined in advance, and the number of change steps may be determined based on the current display mode and the final display mode at the start of each change.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine of a modified example provided with a sub display device 5 </ b> S in addition to the image display device 5. In the pachinko gaming machine of the modification shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, a sub display device 5 </ b> S composed of an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like is provided below the image display device 5. The sub display device 5S may be provided so as to be operable.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the modification shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the first hold display portion 5HL, the second hold display portion 5HR, and the active display portion AHA are provided in the sub display device 5S. Of these, at least a part of the image display device 5 may be provided. In the pachinko gaming machine of the modification shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, an effect accompanied by an effect effect in which the arrow images 202 and 203 act on the hold display or the active display is executed as the hold notice effect.

  In this modified example, as shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (5), an effect effect A executed using only the sub display device 5S and an image as shown in FIGS. 30 (3) to (5). An effect B that is executed in conjunction with the display device 5 and the sub display device 5S can be executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (5), in the on-hold notice effect with the effect effect A of the modified example, the arrow image 202 appears on the sub display device 5S, and the active display (the corresponding display may be sufficient). The display mode of the active display changes upon hitting.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 (3) to 30 (5), in the hold notice effect with the effect effect B of the modified example, an arrow image 203 appears in the image display device 5, and the arrow image 203 is displayed as the sub display device 5S. The display mode of the active display is changed by hitting the active display (which may be a corresponding display).

  In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the modification, it is possible to execute the hold notice effect (action effect) using a plurality of display devices, and the hold notice effect (action effect) becomes various.

  Then, which of the effect display A executed by using the sub display device 5S and the effect effect B executed by the mode in which the image display device 5 and the sub display device 5S are linked to each other has changed the corresponding display. Depending on the situation, the degree of expectation (the player's advantage) may be different. For example, it is only necessary to determine which action effect is to be executed at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. In the determination ratio shown in FIG. 31, the expectation (reliability) and super reach reliability for the big hit are higher when the action effect B is executed than when the action effect A is executed. Yes. By doing in this way, the reservation notice effect and the effect effect become various, and the effect effect of these effects is improved.

  The sub display device 5S serving as the first effect device, the image display device 5 serving as the second effect device, and the LCD, respectively, may be an effect device other than the LCD. For example, various rendering devices such as a dot display device, a segment display device, an LED, an accessory, a light guide plate, and a movable member may be arbitrarily combined. Further, three or more effect devices may be provided. Moreover, although it is physically one display device, a part of the display device may be shielded so that it looks like two display devices.

  In this modification, the display mode of the corresponding display is always changed when the action effect is executed. However, the display notice of the corresponding display is not changed even when the action effect is executed. An effect may be executed. In addition, as in the above-described embodiment, the effect may be stocked. That is, the effect of the modification may be incorporated in the above embodiment. For example, the action effect A of the above embodiment may be an effect executed using the sub display device 5S, and the effect effect B may be an effect executed in a mode in which the image display device 5 and the sub display device 5S are linked. Good. Also in this case, the corresponding display is performed by any one of the action effect A executed using the sub display device 5S and the action effect B executed in a manner in which the image display device 5 and the sub display device 5S are interlocked. What is necessary is just to make it expectation (a player's advantage degree) differ according to whether it changed. Moreover, you may provide the effect presentation C performed by the aspect which made the image display apparatus 5, the sub display apparatus 5S, and other presentation apparatuses (for example, the lamp | ramp of a game frame, etc.) interlock | cooperate.

  Further, in this modification, when the action effect B is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability for the big hit and the super reach reliability) is higher or more advantageous than when the action effect A is executed. Although the case where a degree becomes high is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. This expectation may be a probable big hit expectation, a pseudo-continuous expectation, or the like. In addition, for example, when the action effect B is executed, the proportion of the so-called “gase hold notice effect” may be smaller than when the action effect A is executed, and the gaming state may be changed. When not informing, the ratio that the internal gaming state is advantageous to the player may be increased. On the contrary, you may comprise so that an advantage degree may become low in the direction where the effect presentation B is performed compared with the case where the effect presentation A is performed.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, even when the action effect (action effect A, action effect B, action effect A gaze) is executed, the effect effect B stock (notification effect) is executed. However, the notification effect may not be executed in the variable display in which the effect effect is executed. That is, the notification effect may be executed on the condition that the action effect is not executed in the current variation. The action effect B is always executed after the stock of the effect effect B (notification effect) is executed, but the action effect B may be executed without passing through the notification effect. May be. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect production setting process (step S171 in FIG. 17) in the modified example. In addition, about the process similar to the said embodiment, the same step number is assigned and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the action effect setting process in this modification, when the action effect B is executed in the current variation (step S602; Yes), the stock of the action effect B specified by the stock number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. It is determined whether or not the number is 1 or more (step S621). When the number of stocks of the action effect B is 1 or more (step S621; Yes), the value of the stock number counter is decremented by 1 (step S622), and the action effect setting process ends. When the number of stocks of the effect effect B is 0 (step S621; No), the effect effect setting process is finished as it is. As described above, when the action effect B is executed with the current fluctuation and the number of stocks of the action effect B is 0, the action effect B is directly executed without passing through the notification effect. . If the number of stocks of action effect B is 1 or more, the value of the stock number counter is subtracted by 1 in advance in this process. Step S706) is omitted. In the action effect execution process shown in FIG. 26, when the stock number is determined to be 1 or more, the value of the stock number counter may be subtracted by 1 at that time.

  Moreover, in this modification, when the corresponding display does not change due to the current variation (step S601; No), that is, when neither the effect effect A nor the effect effect B is executed, the presence / absence of the effect effect A gaze is determined (step) S623). Then, only when the action effect (action effect A, action effect B, action effect A gaze) is not executed (step S623; No), the stock number of the effect effect B is determined (step S606). After the processing of S606 is executed, the determination result is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (command buffer at the start winning prize etc.), and the value of the stock number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is updated according to the determination result. (Step S624). When the action effect A gaze is executed (step S623; Yes) or after the process of step S624 is executed, the action effect setting process is terminated.

  According to such a modification, the notification effect is executed in the fluctuation when the action effect is not executed, so that the possibility that some effect is executed during the execution of the hold notice effect increases, and the interest of the hold notice effect is enhanced. Can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, for example, in the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19, for each variable display result such as “big hit (probability / non-probability change)”, “big hit (probability)”, “losing (super reach)”. , The decision ratio allocated to the display stage of the hold display was changed. However, the determination ratio assigned to each display color is arbitrary according to the type of variable display and the variable display result. For example, when “big hit” in which a 16-round game is executed and “big hit” in which a 4-round game is executed are set as variable display results, a final display mode of a pending display of “big hit” in which a 4-round game is executed For example, the determination ratio such as “green” may be set higher than the “big hit” in which the 16-round game is executed. In addition, when the “big hit” is set for the variable display result when the upper limit number of variable displays is 100 times and 50 times, respectively, the last of the “big hit” hold display when the upper limit number of variable displays is 50 times As the display stage, the determination ratio of “green” or the like may be set higher than “big hit” in the short time state where the upper limit number of variable displays is 100 times.

  In the above embodiment, for example, in the process of step 502 shown in FIG. 18, when the first start winning port designation command is received in the low base state, or the second start winning port designation command is received in the high base state. In such a case, the pre-reading notice by the hold notice effect is executed. However, regardless of the received start winning opening designation command, the pre-reading notice by the hold notice effect may be executed only when the gaming state is either the low base state or the high base state.

  In the above embodiment, for example, in the special figure game using the first special figure, as shown in the first special figure display result determination table of FIG. 10 (A), “big hit”, “small hit”, “ In the special figure game using the second special figure as the special figure display result with “losing” as shown in the second special figure display result determination table of FIG. As the display result, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to each special figure display result. However, the special figure display result of the special figure game using the first special figure may be only “big hit” and “losing” and may not include “small hit”. In addition, the special figure display result of the special figure game using the second special figure may include “small hit”.

  In the above embodiment, for example, data may be exchanged with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the management server via a portable terminal having a two-dimensional code reading function and an internet network connection function. The player connects to the management server using a portable terminal or the like, receives the player's own ID in advance, receives a notification regarding his / her own performance during the game, or past game history It is possible to play a game in a game mode reflecting the above.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, or lighting patterns of segments not limited to numbers and symbols, etc. An example of variable display is shown. However, the variable display result displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B and the special symbol variably displayed are a number indicating "0" to "9" and a symbol indicating "-". It is not limited to what consists of etc. For example, a lighting pattern during variable display of a special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off, and a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off and one pattern in which at least some LEDs are lit (for example, a lost symbol) Are also included in the special symbol variable display (in this case, the one pattern (eg, the lost symbol) appears to blink). Further, the special symbol displayed during variable display may be different from the special symbol displayed as the variable display result. As a special symbol variable display, for example, “−” is blinked, and as a variable display result, other special symbols (“7” for “big hit”, “1” for “losing”, etc. ) Is also included in the special symbol variable display. In addition, the variable display of the decorative design includes a blinking display or scroll display of one type of decorative design. The lighting pattern during the variable display of the normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are extinguished, and a pattern in which all the LEDs are extinguished and one pattern in which at least some of the LEDs are lit (for example, a lost symbol). Repeating alternately is also included in the variable display of normal symbols. Also, the decorative symbol or normal symbol displayed during variable display may be different from the decorative symbol or normal symbol displayed as a variable display result.

  In the above-described embodiment, the ratio (including the determination ratio, etc., the same applies to the probability) may include 0%. In other words, the ratio and probability may be between 0 and 100%. For example, to make one ratio different from the other ratio means that one ratio is, for example, 30%, the other ratio is 70%, and the other ratio is, for example, 0%, and the other ratio is 100%. Including. Further, the sum of one ratio and the other ratio may not be 100% (there may be a part that is not included in either one or the other and may have a predetermined ratio). In addition, when the ratio of the other is higher than the ratio of one, the ratio of one is set to 0% and the ratio of the other is set to 100%. For example, in the above, the variable display pattern selected on the other side is selected on the other side to differentiate the variable display pattern determination rate in the specific period after the advantageous state from the variable display pattern determination ratio outside the specific period. This includes cases where the variable display pattern selected on one side and the variable display pattern selected on the other side partially overlap or do not completely overlap. These may be defined by the contents of a table that defines the ratio.

  In the above embodiment, the pre-reading determination is performed on the main side, and the command corresponding to the determination result is transmitted to the sub-side. You may do it.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs probability variation control in which the jackpot type is “probability variation” when a jackpot symbol indicating a predetermined number is derived and displayed as a variable symbol display result of the special symbol. For example, a probability variation determination device type pachinko gaming machine in which probability variation control is performed based on a game ball passing through a specific region in an attacker provided in the game region may be used.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence or absence of the pseudo-continuous, etc., one change pattern command is given when the change is started. Although an example of transmission is shown, a variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the gaming control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-continuity, whether there is a slip effect, etc. before reaching reach (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach does not reach, the so-called first You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control board 12 may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. When two commands are sent, the two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is transmitted, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt is transmitted). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped according to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it applies to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible. For example, when applied to a slot machine, the total number of winning combinations such as a small combination or replaying combination (replay) is counted, and the winning rate is calculated based on the total number of winning combinations generated and a specific effect May be configured to execute.

  In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decoration LED Various rendering operations including, etc. can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Alternatively, it may be distributed in a pre-installed manner in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown to the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

In addition, as a gaming machine of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901) that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Corresponding display means (for example, first hold display portion 5HL, second hold display portion 5HR, active display portion AHA) capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in any of a plurality of display modes having different expectations.
Notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect that continuously notifies over a predetermined period that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level (for example, effect control for executing the processes of steps S604, S606, and S702) CPU 120),
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S605 and S704) for executing an suggestion effect that suggests that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level;
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving the electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals) Luminous body driver 90411, motor driving driver 90412, and luminous body drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
The other output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the control signals are the same. Transmitted sequentially between the light emitter drivers on the light emitter control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high) and low. Slew rate output state),
The suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate when the notification effect is being executed than when the notification effect is not being executed (for example, in the process of step S605, the determination shown in FIG. 24). A game machine characterized by determining whether or not the performance effect A gaze is executed in proportion.

The gaming machine is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a pachinko gaming machine 901) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Corresponding display means (for example, first hold display portion 5HL, second hold display portion 5HR, active display portion AHA) capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display in any of a plurality of display modes having different expectations.
Notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect that continuously notifies over a predetermined period that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level (for example, effect control for executing the processes of steps S604, S606, and S702) CPU 120),
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S605 and S704) for executing an suggestion effect that suggests that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level;
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving the electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals) Luminous body driver 90411, motor driving driver 90412, and luminous body drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
The other output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided and a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable, a wire harness) (for example, in FIG. 46 (2)). As shown, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F with different control signals. Transmitted sequentially),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 54, in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the S terminal is L (low). Set to the normal slew rate output state),
The suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate when the notification effect is being executed than when the notification effect is not being executed (for example, in the process of step S605, the determination shown in FIG. 24). (Determining whether or not the action effect A gaze is executed)
There is also a gaming machine characterized by this.

  According to such a gaming machine, a sense of expectation can be suitably improved by suggestion production, and interest is improved. In addition, the noise tolerance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. In addition, if an unintended performance occurs due to noise during the game, the player may feel discomfort or distrust. Can be suppressed. This leads to the reliability of the gaming machine. In particular, the correspondence display is one of the places where the player pays particular attention during the game, and it is possible to highly suppress the occurrence of unintended display in such a correspondence display. The effect that it can improve can be acquired more.

Furthermore, the following gaming machines (a) and (b) can be cited as examples of gaming machines that can increase the noise tolerance of control signals for preventing malfunctions.
(A) Electric parts (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LEDs 909a, left frame LEDs 909b, right frame LEDs 909c, and operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating the movable members 9051 to 9054 ) Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
Other output means are provided on the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the same control signal is emitted. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high) and low. A gaming machine characterized by being set to a slew rate output state).
(B) Electric components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating the movable members 9051 to 9054 ) Control means (for example, a production control microcomputer 90120),
Output means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving electrical components in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) , A light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c),
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means. A first output state in which a waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, an output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). ))) And a second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode that is more gradual than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). (For example, when the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate (FIG. 48). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board provided with the output means via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable, a wire harness) (for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (2)). As described above, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and sequentially between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F with different control signals. Transmitted),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 54, in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the S terminal is L (low). And a normal slew rate output state).
Hereinafter, examples of these gaming machines will be described as other examples.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, other exemplary embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 36 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine and shows an arrangement layout of main members. In FIG. 36, an effect movable mechanism 9050 described later is indicated by a broken line. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 903 that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. The game board 902 is formed with a game area surrounded by guide rails and having a substantially circular outer edge. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 36, on the lower right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and is identified in a special graphic game as an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 902, a main image display device 905MA is provided. The main image display device 905MA is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the main image display device 905MA, it corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game. Thus, for example, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be individually identified are variably displayed in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R arranged in the display area of the main image display device 905MA, the decorative symbols corresponding to each are variably displayed. In this case, in response to the start of one of the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special symbol game. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R for “left”, “middle”, and “right”, variation of decorative symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. Thereafter, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbols can be changed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result is stopped and displayed.

  In this way, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 904B is used. In synchronism with the special game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as “temporary stop display”, and although the display result in the variable display has not been displayed deterministically, the player has confirmed that the variation of the decorative pattern due to scroll display or update display has not progressed. It becomes possible to recognize. The temporary stop display does not cause slight shaking or expansion / contraction, etc., and the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed for a period until a short stop time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses. May be included.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese numerals) Or a combination of English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, numbers, letters or symbols and character images, and character images are, for example, people, animals, other objects, or It may be configured to include a symbol such as a character or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each of the decorative symbols is given a corresponding symbol number. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  After the decorative symbol variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are displayed until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. In FIG. 5, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol number sequentially flows from the top to the bottom from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, The decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbol number is scrolled from the largest to the smallest, and the symbol is displayed. When the decorative design with the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design with the largest design number may be displayed.

  Note that the decorative symbols are not limited to those that are variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information, and corresponding to the variation of the special symbols in the special symbol game, the image display device 905 (main image display device 905MA or a sub image described later). Any effect image can be displayed on the screen of the display device 905 SU or the like. For example, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, an effect that displays the result of the story corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol may be executed by displaying the effect image having the story. As an effect by displaying the effect image, for example, a battle effect in which a wrestling or soccer game or an enemy ally character fights may be performed. When the variable display result is “losing”, an effect of defeating the game or battle is performed. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, an effect of winning the game or battle is performed. Alternatively, for example, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, the display color change display and the stop display in a specific display region are repeated. And when the variable display result is “losing”, by maintaining the state where the predetermined display color (for example, white) is stopped and displayed, or by maintaining the predetermined display color in a non-display state, Derived and displayed decorative symbols. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the decorative design is derived and displayed by maintaining the state where the display is stopped with a display color (for example, red) different from the predetermined display color. In this way, during the variable display of decorative symbols, a predetermined (single) symbol may be switched between display and non-display, while other symbols may be maintained in a non-display state. Then, any of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (final stop display) as the final stop symbol (determined ornament symbol) that is a variable display result of the ornament symbol. In addition, during the variable display of the decorative design, display and non-display of the effect image showing the predetermined design may be repeated so that other effect images are not displayed. As a result of the variable display of decorative symbols, the effect image indicating the predetermined symbol used for variable display is not stopped and displayed, and the effect image indicating a specific number or symbol different from the predetermined symbol is displayed. By displaying, a decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  On the screen of the main image display device 905MA, a start winning storage display area 905H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 905H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. Occurs based on starting prizes by entering. In other words, a start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  For example, a special game start condition (first start condition) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A due to the occurrence of the first start prize that the game ball passes (enters) through the first start prize opening. ) Is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first special figure holding storage number is 1 Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when a second start winning that the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening is generated, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B (second start condition) ) Is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is 1 Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented).

  The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the start winning memory display area 905H or instead of the start winning memory display area 905H. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memory in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B together with the start winning memory display area 905H. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED).

  On the right side of the main image display device 905MA, a sub image display device 905SU that displays various images including a plurality of types of effect images is provided separately from the main image display device 905MA. The installation location of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU is not limited to the vicinity of the center of the game area on the game board 902. For example, the main image display device 905MA is installed near the center of the game area, The sub image display device 905SU may be installed at an arbitrary position in the pachinko gaming machine 901, such as outside the gaming area, the upper front portion of the gaming machine frame 903, the lower front portion, or the front side.

  Below the main image display device 905MA, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9027 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed. The normally variable winning ball device 906B is in a closed state in which the game ball does not pass (enter) through the second starting winning port when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, when the solenoid 9027 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning hole. ) Make it open.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 907 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9028 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 39, and is changed into a specific region that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening. In the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the special winning opening door solenoid 9028 is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening, and the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the grand prize winning opening, and the game ball passes through the big winning prize entrance (entrance). ). In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the game balls detected by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning device 907 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the special winning prize opening. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 36, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Above the normal symbol display 9020, there is provided a general symbol hold indicator 9025C for displaying the number of general symbols reserved as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 9041.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 902 may be provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball, a number of obstacle nails, and a single or a plurality of general winning holes. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  The game board 902 is provided with an effect moving mechanism 9050 as a movable member capable of executing a display effect by lighting the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment. The effect movable mechanism 9050 has a plurality of (for example, four) movable members. The effect movable mechanism 9050 changes between a retracted state in which a plurality of movable members are positioned separately on the upper and lower screens of the main image display device 905MA and an advanced state in which the plurality of movable members are positioned in front of the screen of the main image display device 905MA. be able to. In the following description, the up / down / left / right and front / rear directions will be described with reference to the state facing the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The effect movable mechanism 9050 shown in FIG. 36 is for the retreat state. In this embodiment, a game area of the game board 902 is constituted by a transparent plate (not shown) made of, for example, resin, and the effect movable mechanism 9050 is arranged behind the transparent plate, and the game ball is shown as an effect. It flows down in front of the movable mechanism 9050. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and at least one of the plurality of movable members of the effect movable mechanism 9050 may be disposed in front of the transparent plate forming the game area.

  FIG. 37 shows a case where a plurality of movable members provided in the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state located in front of the main image display device 905MA. FIG. 38 shows an operation example of the effect movable mechanism 9050. The effect movable mechanism 9050 includes an upper mechanism including two movable members 9051 and 9052 positioned on the upper screen side of the main image display device 905MA in the retracted state, and 2 positioned on the lower screen side of the main image display device 905MA in the retracted state. It can be separated into a lower mechanism having two movable members 9053 and 9054. That is, the effect movable mechanism 9050 is configured to include an upper mechanism and a lower mechanism that can be arranged apart from or in close proximity to each other. When the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are separated from each other, the retracted state as the first state is established. On the other hand, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are close to each other, the advancing state as the second state is obtained. The upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are provided with drive means for changing between a retracted state and an advanced state. The movable members 9051 and 9052 are configured such that their left ends are pivotally supported by a decoration member 9057 and are rotatable with respect to the decoration member 9057. The decoration member 9057 moves up and down with the operation of the movable member 9051 when the power from the operation motor 9060A shown in FIG.

  The movable member 9051 includes a front surface portion and a base body disposed behind the front surface portion, and holds the movable member 9052 between the front surface portion and the base body. The movable member 9052 receives power from the operation motor 9060B shown in FIG. 39 and rotates upward or downward with respect to the movable member 9051. The operation motor 9060B only needs to be attached to the front surface of the base body included in the movable member 9051. The operation motor 9060B provides a driving force for driving the movable member 9052 to be operable. The movable members 9053 and 9054 are connected to a predetermined link mechanism and the like, and are moved up and down by transmitting power from the operation motor 9060C shown in FIG. 39 via a power transmission unit engaged with the link mechanism. However, it can be rotated around the left end.

  A movable member position sensor 9061 shown in FIG. 39 is provided at a predetermined position of the effect movable mechanism 9050. The movable member position sensor 9061 may be any sensor that can directly or indirectly detect the states of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057. As an example, the movable member position sensor 9061 may include first to third position sensors provided corresponding to the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. Each of the first to third position sensors is configured by using a photo interrupter, a rotary encoder, and the like. From the operation states of the corresponding operation motors 9060A to 9060C, for example, the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decoration member 9057 Any member that can detect the states of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 may be used. As a specific example, the first position sensor detects the rotation amount of the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060A, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060A. A position detection signal that can specify the operation positions of the movable members 9051 and 9052 and the decorative member 9057 is output. The second position sensor detects the amount of rotation about the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060B, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060B, thereby moving the movable member relative to the movable member 9051. A position detection signal capable of specifying the relative operation position 9052 and the like is output. The third position sensor detects the rotation amount of the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060C, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060C, so that the movable members 9053 and 9054 can move. A position detection signal capable of specifying the operation position is output.

  As another example, the movable member position sensor 9061 may include first to fifth position sensors provided corresponding to the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057, respectively. The first to fourth position sensors are provided corresponding to the movable members 9051 to 9054, respectively, and the fifth position sensor is provided corresponding to the decorative member 9057, each of which is a photo interrupter, a linear encoder, and other infrared sensors. What is necessary is just to be comprised using. Accordingly, the first to fifth position sensors may detect the operation state of the corresponding movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 and output a position detection signal according to the detection result. As described above, the movable member position sensor 9061 may be configured to include a plurality of position sensors provided corresponding to the plurality of movable members, respectively.

  In each of the movable members 9051 and 9052, a plurality of light emitters are arranged in alignment along a predetermined direction such as a vertical and horizontal direction (up and down, left and right directions). The plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the movable member 9051 constitute a light emitter unit 9071 of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG. The plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the movable member 9052 constitute 90 of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG. As described above, the movable members 9051 and 9052 each include a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix.

  The plurality of light emitters arranged so as to constitute the light emitter units 9071 and 9072 each include a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different emission colors. For example, a full color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is used as each light emitter. As a result, the movable member 9051 and the movable member 9052 emit light from the light emitting unit 9071 such as rainbow display by displaying various colors in a single color and displaying a plurality of colors separately in the region. The display effect by the lighting mode of the plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged in the body unit 9072 can be executed. In this way, the light emitter unit 9073 and the light emitter unit 9074 can change the color or pattern of display (light emission) using a plurality of light emitters with the passage of time and execute a display effect. In front of the plurality of light emitters aligned and arranged by the light emitter units 9071 and 9072 included in the movable members 9051 and 9052, partition bodies formed in a lattice shape are provided so as to partition each of the plurality of light emitters. ing. Further, a front plate for decorating the movable members 9051 and 9052 is provided on the front surface of the partition body of the movable members 9051 and 9052.

  Like the movable members 9051 and 9052, the movable members 9053 and 9054 each include a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix. That is, in each of the movable members 9053 and 9054, a plurality of light emitters are aligned and arranged along a predetermined direction such as a vertical and horizontal direction (up and down, left and right directions). The plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged by the movable member 9053 constitute a light emitter unit 9073 among the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG. The plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged by the movable member 9054 constitute a light emitter unit 9074 among the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG.

  The plurality of light emitters arranged so as to constitute the light emitter units 9073 and 9074 each include a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different emission colors. For example, a full color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is used as each light emitter. As a result, the movable member 9053 and the movable member 9054 emit light from the light emitter unit 9073, such as rainbow display by displaying various colors in a single color, as well as displaying a plurality of colors separately in the region. It is possible to execute a display effect in a lighting manner of a plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged in the body unit 9074. In this way, the light emitter unit 9073 and the light emitter unit 9074 can change the color or pattern of display (light emission) using a plurality of light emitters with the passage of time and execute a display effect. In front of the plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged by the light emitter units 9073 and 9074 included in the movable members 9053 and 9054, a partition body formed in a lattice shape so as to partition each of the plurality of light emitters is provided. ing. Further, a front plate for decorating the movable members 9053 and 9054 is provided on the front surface of the partition body of the movable members 9053 and 9054.

  Note that the plurality of light emitters are not limited to those using full-color LEDs, and for example, single-color or multi-color LEDs may be used, or light emitters other than LEDs may be used. The partition may be configured by a member that is three-dimensionally formed in a lattice shape, or may be configured, for example, by forming a lattice-shaped pattern on a transparent or translucent plate material by printing or cutting. . The partition is not limited to one configured to partition a plurality of light emitters one by one, and may be configured to partition a plurality of light emitters by a predetermined number, or may be configured in a predetermined direction (for example, lateral direction And the vertical direction). Furthermore, such a partition may not be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 38A, in the retracted state in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are separated from each other, the movable members 9051 to 9054 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA. Don't be. At this time, each of the movable members 9051 and 9052 is located above the main image display device 905MA, and the movable member 9052 is located behind the movable member 9051, so that the player cannot see or difficult to see the movable member 9052. It becomes. In addition, each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 is located below the main image display device 905MA, and the movable member 9053 is located behind the movable member 9054, so that the player cannot visually recognize or difficult to see the movable member 9053. Become. Thus, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the retracted state, the display screen of the main image display device 905MA becomes visible.

  As shown in FIG. 38B, in the advanced state where the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are close to each other, the movable members 9051 to 9054 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA. . When changing from the retracted state to the advanced state, the movable member 9052 moves downward from the back side of the movable member 9051 with rotation, and the movable member 9053 moves upward from the back side of the movable member 9054 with rotation. To do. In addition, the movable member 9051 moves downward with the movement of the movable member 9052, and the movable member 9054 moves upward with the movement of the movable member 9053. Thus, when the upper side mechanism and the lower side mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, the display screen of the main image display device 905MA becomes difficult or impossible to see.

  When the upper and lower mechanisms of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the retracted state, as shown in FIG. 38A, the arrangement directions of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with the movable members 9051 to 9054 are the same. do not do. On the other hand, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, as shown in FIG. 38B, the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with the movable members 9051 to 9054, respectively. Match. As described above, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, the movable members 9051 are aligned by aligning the arrangement directions of the plurality of light emitters aligned and arranged on the movable members 9051 to 9054, respectively. ˜9054 can give a sense of unity to the display effect. In particular, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, by performing an integral display effect with the plurality of movable members 9051 to 9054, the interest of the effect can be improved. Moreover, since the visibility with respect to the display screen of the main image display device 905MA changes depending on the positions of the plurality of movable members 9051 to 9054, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming monotonous and improve the interest of the production.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c are provided at the periphery of the gaming area. Is provided. Each structure in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, a frame member arranged at the peripheral edge of the main image display device 905MA, etc.) A decorative LED may be disposed around the periphery. A hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. A lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided below the gaming machine frame 903.

  A stick controller 9031A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick gripped by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A controller sensor unit including a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower pan body or the like below the stick controller 9031A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 901. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 9031B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 9031A). Is provided. The push button 9031B may be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B. It should be noted that the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B can change the display effect on the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU by the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. Effects such as operation in the movable mechanism 9050, sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and lighting operations (flashing operations) in light emitters such as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c (for example, a notice effect or a reach effect) It may be used in such as. Instead of the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B, or in addition to the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B, a sensor or the like for detecting the operation of the player may be provided. For example, it may have a configuration for directly detecting the player's movement, such as a jog dial that can be rotated, a touch panel that can be touched or pressed, an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, A configuration may be provided that indirectly (remotely) detects the player's operation, such as a CMOS sensor. An arbitrary action may be detected by analyzing a result of photographing a subject such as a player's hand using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). In other words, any configuration that can detect the operation of an arbitrary object mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically may be provided.

  Various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, and an audio output board 9013 as shown in FIG. 39 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. Further, a drive control board 9016B and light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F are mounted as control boards connected to the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back of the game board 902 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 9012 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 9011 performs lighting control and light-off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and performs the first special diagram and the second special symbol display. It also has a function of controlling the variable display of a predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of a special figure. For example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted on the main board 9011 shown in FIG. The switch circuit 90110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the microcomputer 90100 for game control. The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 to a solenoid 9027 for a normal electric accessory and a solenoid 9028 for a special prize opening door.

  As shown in FIG. 39, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 9021, a start port switch (first start port switch 9022A and second start port switch 9022B), and a count switch 9023 are transmitted to the main board 9011. Wiring is connected. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example.

  The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub-side independent of the main board 9011. Based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display are displayed. Device 905SU, luminous body units 9071 to 9074, speakers 908L and 908R, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, movable members 9051 to 9054 and decoration members 9057 connected to operation motors 9060A to 9060C, and other effects Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by various electrical components for rendering such as a device are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 displays images on the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, lights on a plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, Lighting motors 9060A to 9060C for moving lighting members, movable members 9051 to 9054, and decorative members 9057 that are different from the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in the light emitting members constituting the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the decoration LEDs. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as a driving operation of On the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 39, an effect control microcomputer 90120, a ROM 90121, a RAM 90122, and effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are mounted.

  On the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, and an audio signal (sound effect signal) to the audio output board 9013 are transmitted. Wiring etc. are connected. In addition, wiring for transmitting various signals to the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the light emitter control board 9016D is also connected via the effect control relay board 9016A. The information signal transmitted to the drive control board 9016B may include a drive control signal indicating a command or control data for moving the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 by driving the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. . The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016C only needs to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for turning on the light emitters 9071 to 9074.

  The light emitter control board 9016D is mounted on the left side of the gaming machine frame 903, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016D is provided as a left frame LED 909b on the left side of the gaming machine frame 903. It is only necessary to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters. The light emitter control board 9016E is mounted above the gaming machine frame 903, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016E is provided as a top frame LED 909a above the gaming machine frame 903. What is necessary is just to include the lighting signal which shows the light emission data for lighting a several light-emitting body. The light emitter control board 9016F is mounted on the right side of the gaming machine frame 903, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016F is provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 903 as a right frame LED 909c. It is only necessary to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016D is only the effect control relay board 9016A from the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012. To be transmitted. The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016E is transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 via the light emitter control board 9016D in addition to the effect control relay board 9016A. The Further, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 9016F is sent from the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 to the light emitter control board 9016D and the light emitter control board 9016E in addition to the effect control relay board 9016A. To be transmitted.

  Further, from the drive control board 9016B, a position detection signal as an information signal indicating a result of detecting the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 by the movable member position sensor 9061 is provided through the effect control relay board 9016A. Is transmitted to. Further, as an information signal indicating that a player's operation act on the push button 9031B has been detected, a wiring for receiving an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation act on the stick controller 9031A has been detected. The wiring for receiving the operation detection signal may be connected to the effect control board 9012.

  The audio output board 9013 is an audio output board provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R serving as sound output devices in accordance with the audio signal from the effect control board 9012. Various circuits are installed.

  The effect control relay board 9016A is installed in a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 902, and transmitted from the effect control board 9012 to the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the light emitter control board 9016D. Relay various signals. The back pack is attached to the center portion on the back side of the game board 902, and an opening facing the main image display device 905MA may be formed at the center. The back pack may be provided so as to cover the main board 9011, the audio output board 9013, the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the like from the rear. An effect control board box in which the effect control board 9012 is accommodated may be attached to the rear side of the back pack.

  The drive control board 9016B is a control board for controlling the effect movable mechanism provided separately from the effect control board 9012. The drive control board 9016B rotates the movable members 9051 to 9054 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. A driver IC for performing control and movement control of the decorative member 9057 is mounted. An output signal from the drive control board 9016B is transmitted toward the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. If the drive control board 9016B includes wiring for transmitting the position detection signal output from the movable member position sensor 9061 to the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. Good. The light emitter control board 9016C is a light emitter output control board provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. Various circuits for driving the light emitter for performing lighting control on the plurality of light emitters are mounted.

  The light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are mounted on the gaming machine frame 903 and are light emitter output control boards provided separately from the effect control board 9012. Commands, control data, etc. from the effect control board 9012, etc. Based on the above, various circuits for driving a light emitter for performing lighting control on a plurality of light emitters provided as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are mounted.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, and a sound used for controlling sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Control command, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, decorative LED, light emitter control command used to control lighting operations of a plurality of light emitters constituting light emitter units 9071 to 9074, etc. A movable mechanism control command used for controlling the operation of the mechanism 9050 and the like is included.

  A game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, etc. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105 are provided. Note that the random number circuit 90104 is not limited to that incorporated in the game control microcomputer 90100, and may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 90100.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by the CPU 90103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, the CPU 90103 writes various data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 90103 stores various data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The random number circuit 90104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of various random numbers used to control the progress of the game.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 90101 is configured with a table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 40 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 9012. On the effect control board 9012, for example, an effect control microcomputer 90120, ROM 90121, RAM 90122, effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the like are mounted. The ROM 90121, the RAM 90122, and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C may be partly or entirely built in the effect control microcomputer 90120, or part or all of the ROM 90121, the RAM 90122, and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C may be external to the effect control microcomputer 90120. It may be attached. The effect control microcomputer 90120 shown in FIG. 40 is configured using, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a CPU 90130, a work memory 90131, a host interface 90132, a DRAM interface 90133, and a data memory interface 90134. Yes. The effect control microcomputer 90120 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 90140, a VRAM (Video RAM) 90141, a display output system interface 90142, an audio processing circuit 90143, an audio interface 90144, and a general-purpose output controller 90145. It has. Note that the VDP 90140 may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The VDP 90140, the VRAM 90141, the display output system interface 90142, the audio processing circuit 90143, the audio interface 90144, and the general-purpose output controller 90145 may be partly or wholly built in the production control microcomputer 90120, or a part thereof. Alternatively, all may be configured as an external circuit of the production control microcomputer 90120.

  The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes control processing according to the effect control program. The ROM 90121 stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like that are read for the CPU 90130 to execute control processing. The RAM 90122 temporarily stores various effect data read from the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. The effect data temporarily stored in the RAM 90122 is provided to execute various processes by the CPU 90130 and the VDP 90140. The ROM 90121 stores various data tables used for controlling the rendering operation, in addition to the rendering control program. For example, the ROM 90121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination table, and various effect control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern is, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, light emitter control data, movable member control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, etc. It is composed of process data including The RAM 90122 stores various data used for controlling the rendering operation.

  The effect data memories 90123A to 90123C store fixed data for executing effects. Among the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B have storage areas for storing in advance various image data (image element data) indicating display images in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. What is necessary is just to be provided. In the effect data memory 90123C, various motor data indicating the drive control contents of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C are stored in advance, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. A storage area or the like for storing in advance various light emission data indicating the lighting control content may be provided. Note that the light emission data indicating the lighting control content of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be generated using image data. The effect data memories 90123A to 90123C may be non-rewritable semiconductor memories, for example, may be rewritable semiconductor memories such as flash memories such as NAND-ROMs, or are non-volatile such as magnetic memories and optical memories. Any recording medium may be used.

  Data for creating lighting data (light emission data) of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. Separately from the image data of the effect image, it is stored in advance in one of the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B. The data for creating the lighting data (light emission data) of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is added to the image data of the effect image displayed on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU, and effect data memories 90123A and 90123B. It may be stored in advance in either of these. Alternatively, the data for creating the lighting data of the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 may be effect data memories 90123A to 90123A as image data or light emission data separate from the image data of the effect image displayed on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU. When the VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes the drawing process, display data that is stored in advance in any of the 90123C displays the effect image on the display screen of the sub image display device 905SU. It may be added to the data.

  FIG. 41 shows a setting example of addresses and stored contents in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. FIG. 41A shows a setting example of the stored contents in the ROM 90121. The ROM 90121 is assigned consecutive addresses from the address MA00 as the leading address to the address MA10 as the final address. FIG. 41 (B1) shows a setting example of storage contents in the effect data memory 90123A. In the effect data memory 90123A, an address MA10 + 1 that is the next address continuous to the final address of the ROM 90121 is given as a head address, and a continuous address up to the address MA20 that is the final address is given. FIG. 41 (B2) shows an example of setting the storage contents in the effect data memory 90123B. In the effect data memory 90123B, an address MA20 + 1 that is the next address continuous to the final address of the effect data memory 90123A is given as a head address, and a continuous address up to the address MA30 that is the final address is given. FIG. 41 (B3) shows a setting example of storage contents in the effect data memory 90123C. In the effect data memory 90123C, an address MA30 + 1 that is the next address continuous to the final address of the effect data memory 90123B is given as a head address, and a continuous address up to the address MA40 that is the final address is given. In this way, consecutive addresses are assigned to the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the next address of the final address in the ROM 90121 is the head address of the effect data memory 90123A.

  In ROM 90121 and effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, programs and data used for execution of effects by various effect devices are stored in advance as effect data (including binary codes constituting a program module). The ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are provided with a plurality of storage areas (storage areas) corresponding to the stored contents. For example, the ROM 90121 has a first storage area in which a program for production control and various management data are stored, a second storage area in which audio data is stored, and reserves other than the first storage area and the second storage area. There is an area. For example, when the entire ROM 90121 has a storage capacity of 8 gigabits, the first storage area may have a storage capacity of 1 gigabit and the second storage area may have a storage capacity of 6 gigabits. The first storage area may have a storage capacity of 1.5 gigabits or 2 gigabits. The effect data memory 90123A is provided with a storage area for storing audio data and a storage area for storing image data. Table data of various tables prepared for the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting the effect control pattern, and the like are stored in the ROM 90121 as management data. That's fine. The ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A store audio data used for controlling sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R. The effect data memories 90123A and 90123B store image data used for controlling the display of effect images on the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, and further, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, and right frame. Image data used for lighting control of a light emitter such as the LED 909c and a plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be stored.

  The ROM 90121 is provided with a storage area for storing sound data, and at least the sound data is stored. Accordingly, the ROM 90121 provides a first area for storing audio data as first control data used for audio control for outputting audio from at least the speakers 908L and 908R. The effect data memory 90123A is provided with a storage area for storing image data. Therefore, the effect data memory 90123A is a display control for displaying an image on the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, or a light emitter such as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. A second area is provided for storing image data as second control data used for lighting control for lighting a plurality of light emitters arranged in the.

  In this embodiment, a storage area for storing audio data is provided not only in the ROM 90121 but also in the effect data memory 90123A. The storage area for storing audio data in the ROM 90121 is allocated from the address MA02 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 41 (B1), the storage area in which the audio data is stored in the effect data memory 90123A is allocated from the address MA10 + 1 to the address MA11, which is the head address of the effect data memory 90123A. As described above, the effect data memory 90123A providing the second area stores the audio data in the continuous specific address range from the next address MA10 + 1 to the address MA11 of the final address MA10 of the ROM 90121 providing the first area. An area is allocated. In the effect data memory 90123A providing the second area, audio data as first control data is stored in a storage area corresponding to a specific address range continuous from the final address of the ROM 90121 providing the first area. That is, the audio data as the first control data is stored not only in the storage area provided in the ROM 90121 that provides the first area, but also in the storage area provided in the effect data memory 90123A that provides the second area. It is also stored in a storage area to which consecutive addresses from address MA10 + 1 to address MA11, which are the next addresses of address MA10, are assigned.

  The effect data memory 90123A originally provides a storage area for storing image data used for display control of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. On the other hand, because it is necessary to prepare audio data corresponding to various musical pieces, the amount of control information to be stored in the ROM 90121 or the like for controlling the effects by various effect devices increases, and the storage capacity becomes insufficient. There is a case. In this case, if a separate new storage device is prepared, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 901 increases. Therefore, the production cost of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be reduced by providing a storage area for data used for control different from the image data in the effect data memory 90123A. When providing an audio data storage area, a storage area corresponding to a specific address range continuous from the last address assigned to the audio data storage area in the ROM 90121 is allocated to the effect data memory 90123A. As a result, even if the audio data is stored across both the storage area of the ROM 90121 and the storage area of the effect data memory 90123A, it is read while updating (incrementing) the address in the same manner as other audio data. Thus, the audio data can be appropriately read out.

  The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 shown in FIG. 40 executes a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric parts in accordance with the effect control program read from the ROM 90121. At this time, the CPU 90130 reads fixed data from the ROM 90121 via the host interface 90132, the CPU 90130 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90122 via the DRAM interface 90133, and temporarily stores them. The CPU 90130 reads out various data temporarily stored in the RAM 90122 via the DRAM interface 90133, and the CPU 90130 receives various signals from the outside of the effect control microcomputer 90120 such as the main board 9011 through the host interface 90132 or the like. Receiving operation for accepting input, the CPU 90130 uses the host interface 90132 and other various circuits for effect control micro Such transmission operation to the outside of the computer 90 120 outputs various signals is also performed. In addition, the CPU 90130 can access the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via the data memory interface 90134, and read stored data.

  The VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 has an image data processing function such as a high-speed rendering function and a moving image decoding function for displaying various images on the screens of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, for example. The image processor executes image data processing in accordance with a display control command from the CPU 90130. The VDP 90140 can access the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 or the data memory interface 90134, and read image data.

  The VRAM 90141 provides a work area for temporarily storing the image data read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B, or a virtual display in which display data of the effect image created by the drawing processing by the VDP 90140 is expanded and stored. Or provide an area. If the storage area of the VRAM 90141 is allocated with areas such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data read from the image data memory 121 is stored, and a CG buffer, for example. Good. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data in which the display color of the character is defined when the rendering process by the VDP 90140 is executed, or temporarily stores the display data of the effect image created by the rendering process. It is used to Display data expanded and stored in the VRAM 90141 may be pixel data (raster data) created by the VDP 90140 based on vector data (vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons, for example. The VRAM 90141 stores, for example, an actual display area that stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, and display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. A virtual display area to be stored may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is created in the virtual display area of the VRAM 90141, and the display data of the virtual display area read out by the VDP 90140 is displayed and output. You may output from the system | strain interface 90142 to the main image display apparatus 905MA side.

  An image display area and an image drawing area may be allocated to the storage area of the VRAM 90141. In the image display area, display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU is stored. In the image drawing area, display data of each effect image created by the drawing process is stored. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V blank is generated. The V blank is generated at a cycle in which an image displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU is updated. Each time a V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal is output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130, and various other interrupt signals are output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130.

  By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V blank period (first drawing display period). In the next V blank period (second drawing display period), the storage area is switched to the image display area. Accordingly, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output from the display output system interface 90142 to the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU in the second drawing display period. In the storage area to which the image drawing area is assigned in the second drawing display period, display data created by the drawing process is stored.

  In the VRAM 90141, a main frame buffer and a sub frame buffer may be allocated to each storage area to which an image display area and an image drawing area are allocated. The main frame buffer stores display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The subframe buffer stores display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the sub-image display device 905SU.

  The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 accesses system registers and attribute registers built in the VDP 90140. Various commands and data are stored in the system register and the attribute register in accordance with process data such as display control data included in the effect control pattern. Thus, in the effect control microcomputer 90120, the CPU 90130 indirectly controls the display operations in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU.

  The process data indicates the setting contents that the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 performs on the system register and attribute register of the VDP 90140 every time V blank occurs. The setting contents of the system register include drawing and data transfer commands, CG data to be transferred, palette data, and attribute settings. The setting contents of the attribute register only need to indicate an attribute as a parameter used for rendering processing of the effect image. In the process data, attributes are set so that the image is updated every time a V blank occurs. As a result, the image can be updated each time a V blank is generated.

  The display output system interface 90142 outputs a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to display data output from the VDP 90140, a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal), and a scanning signal (drive control signal) to the main image display device 905MA. To output various images on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The display output system interface 90142 displays a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to display data output from the VDP 90140, a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal), and a scanning signal (drive control signal) as a sub-image display. Various images can be displayed on the screen of the sub-image display device 905SU by outputting it to the device 905SU.

  The audio processing circuit 90143 is a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing. The audio processing circuit 90143 accesses the ROM 90121 via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the host interface 90132, or effects data memories 90123A to 90123A through the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 and the data memory interface 90134. The voice data can be read out by accessing 90123C. The audio processing circuit 90143 may directly access the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, the audio processing circuit 90143 is read from the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C by the access by the CPU 90130. It may be accessed indirectly by receiving supply of audio data. The audio processing circuit 90143 generates an audio signal (sound effect signal) using the audio data. The audio signal (sound effect signal) generated by the audio processing circuit 90143 is output toward the audio output board 9013 via the audio interface 90144.

  The general-purpose output controller 90145 has various effects such as lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, and light emitter units 9071 to 9074 and drive control of operation motors 9060A to 9060C. It is a control circuit for performing operation control in the apparatus. The general-purpose output controller 90145 can read motor data and light emission data by accessing the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 or the data memory interface 90134. The general-purpose output controller 90145 may directly access the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, motor data or light emission read from the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C by access by the CPU 90130. It may be accessed indirectly by receiving supply of data. The general-purpose output controller 90145 outputs the motor data and light emission data read from the effect data memory 90123C or the display data supplied from the VDP 90140 as serial signal data (serial data). The serial data output from the general-purpose output controller 90145 may be transmitted to the drive control board 9016B, the light emitter control board 9016C, and the light emitter control board 9016D via the effect control relay board 9016A.

  FIG. 42 shows a configuration example of a light emitter control board 9016C for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. Various circuits for controlling lighting modes by a plurality of light emitters in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C. The light emitter control board 9016C shown in FIG. 42 includes a buffer memory 90151, a lighting data generation circuit 90152, a serial output circuit 90153, and a light emitter driver 90154.

  The buffer memory 90151 temporarily stores data transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. The data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 may be data corresponding to the display data generated by the VDP 90140 or the light emission data read from the effect data memory 90123C. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 reads the data stored in the buffer memory 90151 and executes predetermined conversion processing, thereby generating lighting data constituting the lighting control information. The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes drive control data serving as drive control information that specifies the drive timing of the light emitter, and a floor that specifies the luminance (gradation) corresponding to each light emission color of the light emitter. It is only necessary to include gradation data serving as tone control information.

  The lighting data generation circuit 90152 divides a region where a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are arranged in each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 into a plurality of blocks, and the light emitters for each of the blocks. Create lighting data for. In this embodiment, the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 are set in advance as a plurality of blocks. The lighting data generation circuit 90153 generates lighting data corresponding to each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42.

  FIG. 43 shows a setting example in which a region where a plurality of light emitters in the movable member 9051 are arranged and arranged is divided into a plurality of blocks. The regions where the plurality of light emitters are arranged in the movable member 9051 are light emitter blocks B01 to B06 as shown in FIG. 43A and light emitter blocks B07 to B15 as shown in FIG. Divided. Similarly to the movable member 9051, the movable members 9052 to 9054 other than the movable member 9051 are set so as to divide the region where the plurality of light emitters are arranged into a plurality of blocks. As a result, the entirety of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 provided in each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is divided into light emitter blocks B01 to B42. Note that the number of divisions of the light emitter block may be arbitrarily set based on the number of movable members constituting the effect movable mechanism 9050, the size of the region where the plurality of light emitters are arranged, and the like. .

  Each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 has a rectangular shape such as a rectangle or a square as a basic shape. Therefore, depending on the shape of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like, the area where the plurality of light emitters are arranged in each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 cannot be accommodated in the square light emitter block, and one light emission There may be a surplus area where light emitters less than the body block are arranged. In addition, among the plurality of light emitter blocks, there may be an empty area where the light emitter is not disposed in a part of the square shape. Therefore, by including a surplus area where light emitters less than one light emitter block are arranged in an empty area in any one of the light emitter blocks, the processing load of the lighting control for a plurality of light emitters is reduced.

  The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a control signal including lighting control information corresponding to the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 to the light emitter driving unit 90154 by a serial signal method. The control signal corresponding to the lighting data may include a drive control signal corresponding to the drive control data and a gradation data signal corresponding to the gradation data. The serial output circuit 90153 has a plurality of signal output configurations (output circuit and output wiring) such as 21 systems as a serial output system for outputting a control signal. The serial output circuit 90153 is connected to serial signal wirings corresponding to each of the 21 serial output systems K01 to K21, and outputs a control signal including lighting control information to each wiring by a serial signal system. As described above, the serial output circuit 90153 outputs the control signal including the lighting control information to the serial signal wirings of a plurality of systems by the serial signal method.

  FIG. 44 shows a connection setting example between the serial output system and the light emitter block. In the connection setting example shown in FIG. 44, two light emitter blocks among the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 are connected to each of the serial output systems K01 to K21. For example, a light emitter driver for controlling lighting of the light emitter block B01 and the light emitter block B02 is connected to the serial output system K01 via a serial signal wiring. The serial output system K02 is connected to a light emitter block B03 and a light emitter driver for controlling the light emitter block B04 through serial signal wiring. Also in the serial output system K03 and later, a light emitter driver for controlling lighting of two light emitter blocks is connected to one serial output system. A plurality of light emitter drivers that perform lighting control of light emitters included in a light emitter block assigned to one serial output system may be connected by a serial bus system via serial signal wiring. In addition, it is not limited to what is connected by a serial bus system, A some light emitter driver may be connected in series (connected by a daisy chain system).

  The light emitter driving unit 90154 shown in FIG. 42 includes a plurality of driver ICs (light emitter drivers) that control lighting of a plurality of light emitters included in regions divided into the light emitter blocks B01 to B42. . Each driver IC performs lighting control of a plurality of light emitters based on lighting control information indicated by a control signal transmitted from the serial output circuit 90153 via the serial signal wiring. Each driver IC is configured to include, for example, a shift register, converts data transmitted by the serial signal system into data of a parallel signal system, and outputs the data to a plurality of signal lines. Each of the plurality of light emitter drivers has a strobe side driver IC serving as a drive control circuit that performs drive control of the light emitter in accordance with the drive control data indicated by the drive control signal, and gradation data indicated by the gradation data signal. Accordingly, the driver IC is classified into one of the digit-side driver ICs serving as a gradation control circuit that performs gradation control of the light emitter. In each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42, dynamic lighting control of a plurality of light emitters is performed for each light emitter block using a strobe side driver IC and a digit side driver IC. 42, in the light emitter control board 9016C, the control signal transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board 9016C. By doing so, it is configured so as to be transmitted to each light emitter driver.

  FIG. 45 shows a configuration example of a light emitter driver using a driver IC corresponding to the light emitter block B11 as a specific example. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 45, as a plurality of light emitter drivers corresponding to the light emitter block B11, a strobe side light emitter driver 90411S, a digit upper side light emitter driver 90411DU, and a digit lower side light emitter driver 90411DD. Is provided. The serial signal wiring of the serial output system K06 shown in FIG. 44 includes the strobe side light emitter driver 90411S, the digit upper light emitter driver 90411DU, and the digit lower light emitter driver 90411DD corresponding to the light emitter block B11 from the serial output circuit 90153. And then connected to the light emitter driver provided corresponding to the light emitter block B12.

  Different address information is assigned to each of the light emitter driver 90411S, the light emitter driver 90411DU, and the light emitter driver 90411DD. The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a control signal indicating the lighting control information to which the address information is added to the serial signal wiring included in the serial output system K06, so that any of the plurality of light emitter drivers corresponding to the light emitter block B11 is output. Transmit the lighting control information.

  The serial signal wiring may include a serial clock wiring for transmitting the serial clock SC and a serial data wiring for transmitting serial data SD synchronized with the serial clock SC. The light emitter driver connected to the serial signal wiring takes in drive control data or gradation data transmitted as serial data SD synchronized with the serial clock SC, and performs lighting control of the plurality of light emitters.

  The light emitter block B11 includes a half block B11U composed of a plurality of light emitters whose gradation is controlled by a digit upper light emitter driver 90411DU, and a plurality of light emitters whose gradation is controlled by a digit lower light emitter driver 90411DD. It is comprised with the combination with half block B11D comprised from these. Thus, each light emitter block only needs to be configured by a combination of half blocks that are modules smaller than the light emitter block. Note that the plurality of light emitter blocks is not limited to a combination of two half blocks. For example, among the plurality of light emitter blocks, a light emitter block constituted by only one half block may be included in addition to a light emitter block constituted by combining two half blocks. When the light emitter block B11 is configured with only one half block, the light emitter driver 90411S on the strobe side and the light emitter driver 90411DU on the upper digit side are provided, but the light emitter driver 90411DD on the lower digit side is not provided. What is necessary is just composition. In this way, each light emitter block may be configured to include one strobe side light emitter driver and one or two digit side light emitter drivers.

  Half block B11U and half block B11D should just be comprised so that the number of light-emitting bodies may become the same number, respectively. For example, the strobe-side light emitter driver 90411S is connected to 12 strobe signal lines and outputs a strobe signal as a drive control signal for driving and controlling a plurality of light emitters arranged in 12 columns. The digit upper light emitter driver 90411DU and the digit lower light emitter driver 90411DD are each connected to eight digit signal lines, and gradation data for gradation control of a plurality of light emitters arranged in eight rows. The digit signal that becomes the signal is output. Therefore, both the half block B11U corresponding to the digit upper side and the half block B11D corresponding to the digit lower side are formed so as to include a total of 96 light emitters composed of 12 columns on the strobe side and 8 rows on the digit side. Yes. Similarly, the half blocks constituting the light emitter blocks other than the light emitter block B11 may be formed so as to include a total of 96 light emitters. Thus, the half blocks as modules constituting the light emitter block only need to be configured so that the same number of light emitters can be controlled to be turned on.

  Note that the number of light emitters included in one half block is not limited to 96 in total, and may be an arbitrary number determined in advance based on the specification and design of the light emitter driver. For example, when eight strobe signal lines are configured to drive and control a plurality of light emitters arranged in eight columns, a total of 64 light emitters comprising eight columns on the strobe side and eight rows on the digit side are provided. What is necessary is just to form so that it may be contained in one half block. Further, the number of light emitters that can be controlled to be lighted by one half block and the number of light emitters actually included in one half block do not always have to coincide with each other. For example, while the number of light emitters that can be controlled to light in one half block is 96, the number of light emitters actually included in one half block depends on the arrangement of the light emitters in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. There may be fewer than 96. In this way, it is only necessary to control the lighting of a predetermined number of light emitters or less for each half block as a module smaller than a plurality of blocks obtained by dividing a region where a plurality of light emitters are arranged.

  The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data for performing dynamic lighting control of the plurality of light emitters for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. For example, as drive control data serving as drive control information for designating the drive timing of the light emitters, control data for time-sharing driving a plurality of light emitters at different timings for each strobe signal line is generated. Also, gradation data serving as gradation control information for designating luminance (gradation) for each emission color is generated by PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) control corresponding to a plurality of light emitters connected to each digit signal line. The light emitter driver on the digit side is not limited to the one that performs gradation control of the light emitter according to the output period of the pulse signal as in the PWM control method. For example, the number of pulse signals output within a certain period ( What is necessary is just to perform gradation control of the light emitter according to the physical quantity (pulse quantity) of the pulse signal, such as the number of pulses) and the amplitude (drive current value) of the pulse signal.

  The serial output circuit 90153 outputs the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 to the serial signal wiring of the serial output system to which the light emitter block to be controlled for lighting is connected in the serial signal system. A strobe-side light emitter driver provided corresponding to each light emitter block drives and controls a plurality of light emitters connected to the strobe signal line by outputting a strobe signal based on the drive control data. The light emitter driver at the upper or lower digit provided for each light emitter block outputs a digit signal based on the grayscale data, so that multiple light emitters connected to the digit signal line can be grayscaled. Control. Thus, in each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the plurality of light emitters arranged in a row emit light at a duty ratio corresponding to the digit signal during the light emission drive period in which the strobe signal is turned on, and the plurality of light emitter blocks For each of B01 to B42, the lighting mode can be changed by a dynamic lighting method (also referred to as a pulse lighting method, a duty lighting method, or a time division lighting method). As described above, by configuring the dynamic lighting control for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42, the light emitter driving unit 90154 can perform lighting control using a plurality of light emitter drivers in parallel. .

  FIG. 46A shows a configuration example of the drive control board 9016B. As shown in FIG. 46 (1), a motor drive driver 90412 is mounted on the drive control board 9016B. The motor drive driver 90412 receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 9016A. The motor drive driver 90412 performs drive control of the operation motors 9060A, 9060B, and 9060C based on the drive control information indicated by the input control signal.

  The detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061 is also input to the drive control board 9016B and is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. The description is omitted in the example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 46 (2) shows a configuration example of the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F for performing lighting control of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c. As shown in FIG. 46 (2), a light emitter driver 90413b is mounted on the light emitter control board 9016D. The luminous body driver 90413b receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 9016A. Then, the light emitter driver 90413b performs lighting control of the left frame LED 909b based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal. In FIG. 46 (2), the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are connected to each other via a wiring member such as a flexible cable or a wire harness.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (2), a light emitter driver 90413a is mounted on the light emitter control board 9016E. In the illuminant driver 90413a, a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 passes through the effect control relay board 9016A and further passes through the light emitter control board 9016D in a serial signal format. Entered. The light emitter driver 90413a performs lighting control of the top frame LED 909a based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), a light emitter driver 90413c is mounted on the light emitter control board 9016F. The light emitter driver 90413c receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A, and further via the light emitter control board 9016D and the light emitter control board 9016E. Are input in a serial signal format. The light emitter driver 90413c performs lighting control of the right frame LED 909c based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (2), in the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, control signals transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 are respectively sent to different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F. By being sequentially transmitted between the mounted light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are respectively transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, each LED provided in the gaming machine frame 903 is comprehensively expressed as a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c, respectively. A plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided as top frame LEDs 909a above the frame 903, and a plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided as left frame LEDs 909b on the left side of the gaming machine frame 903. It is assumed that a plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided as right frame LEDs 909 c on the right side of the gaming machine frame 903.

  In this embodiment, a light emitter driver (for example, light emitter drivers 90411S, 90411DU, and 90411DD shown in FIG. 45) for controlling the lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. The light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the motor drive driver 90412, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are the same type of serial-parallel conversion circuits. (Integrated circuit (IC)). FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a serial-parallel conversion circuit used as the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG.

  Note that serial-parallel conversion circuits used as the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c convert an input serial signal format signal into a 24-channel parallel signal format signal. There are two types, one that outputs and one that converts the input serial signal format signal into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal, but only the number of some circuit elements and terminals are different. 47 and 48, the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described as a representative example, and the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is different. Only the part will be explained. In this embodiment, the light emitter driver 90411 is realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel converter circuit, and the motor driver 909042 and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel converter circuit. The

  As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the serial-parallel conversion circuit receives a clock signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 via the effect control relay board 9016A and the light emitter control boards 9016D and 9016E. A / I terminal and a DATA / I terminal for inputting data are provided. In addition, a part of the input clock signal and data is branched in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, and can be directly output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit. A DATA / O terminal for through output is provided.

  For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitter driver 90413b of the light emitter control board 16D receives a control signal (clock signal and data) input via the effect control relay board 9016A. Is output to the light emitter driver 90413a of the light emitter control board 9016E, and the clock signal and data are emitted from the CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the light emitter driver 90413b, respectively. It is configured to be output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that implements the body driver 90413a. Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitter driver 90413a of the light emitter control board 9016E is input via the effect control relay board 9016A and the light emitter control board 9016D. The control signal (clock signal and data) is output to the light emitter driver 90413c of the light emitter control board 9016F. The CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit for realizing the light emitter driver 90413a. The clock signal and the data are output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that implements the light emitter driver 90413c.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the clock signal input from the CLK / I terminal and the other part of the data input from the DATA / I terminal are input to the decoder and are converted into 24 channels from the serial signal format. Are decoded into parallel signal format signals. Then, after being stored once in each register provided in the register block, pulse width modulation (PWM) is performed using an internal clock signal (in this example, an internal clock signal of 6 MHz) by an internal oscillation clock circuit. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the case of a 12-channel circuit, it is converted into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal and output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11. The output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are supplied to a light emitter such as an LED or to an operation motor.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with terminals AD0 to AD4 (AD0 to AD5 for a 12-channel circuit) for inputting a decode address. By setting each to H (high) or L (low), it is possible to set an address for each serial-parallel conversion circuit. Data input from DATA / I also includes address information, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit decodes only data that matches the address set in the address information included in the input data into a signal of a parallel signal format. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23.

  In the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, since five terminals AD0 to AD4 are provided for decoding address input, a maximum of 32 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 32 serial-parallel conversions are possible. Circuits can be connected. In the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, since six terminals AD0 to AD5 are provided for decoding address input, a maximum of 64 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 64 serial-parallel conversions are possible. Circuits can be connected.

  The S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the slew rate of the through output of the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the through output of the data output from the DATA / O terminal. . When the S terminal is set to L (low), the clock signal and data through output is set to a normal slew rate output, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the clock signal and data through output has a low slew rate. Set to output.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the slew rate setting of the clock signal and data through output. As shown in FIG. 49 (1), when the S terminal is set to L (low) and set to normal slew rate output, the rising and falling slopes of the waveform of the clock signal and data (voltage change per unit time) Amount) is somewhat large. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49 (2), when the S terminal is set to H (high) and set to a low slew rate output, the clock signal and The rising and falling slopes of the data waveform become gentle.

  In general, in order to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate, it is better to keep the slew rate low, and it is better to set the output to the low slew rate shown in FIG. On the other hand, in order to ensure resistance to noise, it is better that the rising and falling slopes of the waveform are larger, and it is better to set the output of the normal slew rate shown in FIG.

  Note that the setting of the S terminal is not only to set the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the waveform of the through output of the data output from the DATA / O terminal, but also to the clock signal and DATA input from the CLK / I terminal. A function of compensating the output waveform for data input from the / I terminal is provided. That is, generally, the clock signal and data output from the production control microcomputer 90120 and the like are output as a rectangular wave at the output stage, but the CLK / I terminal and the DATA / I terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. When there is a large transmission loss due to the wiring until reaching, a clock signal or data having a waveform broken from the original rectangular wave may be input. In this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion circuit does not simply output the input clock signal or data as it is, but in this way the clock signal or data input in a state of a waveform broken from the original rectangular wave. Has a function of compensating for and outputting a waveform close to the original rectangular wave. In this case, if the output of the normal slew rate is set by the setting of the S terminal, the output signal is compensated for a waveform having a large rising or falling slope, so that the output signal is in a state closer to the original rectangular wave. Can be output, and the influence of external noise can be reduced. However, since the voltage change amount increases momentarily when the rising or falling slope is large, there is a risk that radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate will increase. On the other hand, if the output of the low slew rate is set by setting the S terminal, the waveform is compensated and output with a smaller rising and falling slope. Although it is weak against the influence of noise, the instantaneous voltage change amount can be reduced, and radio wave radiation outside the substrate can be suppressed from increasing.

  In addition, it may be configured to enable or disable the function for compensating the output waveform, and all the functions for compensating the output waveform may be disabled. The function of compensating the output waveform may be realized outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit by providing an amplifier circuit or the like outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit.

  Furthermore, in the above normal slew rate output setting, the output waveform was compensated so that the rising and falling slopes were larger than the rising and falling slopes of the input waveform. As an output setting, the input waveform may be output as it is without compensating the output waveform (that is, the output waveform having a rising edge equivalent to the rising edge of the input waveform as a predetermined mode). In this case, in the low slew rate output setting, it is only necessary to output a waveform whose slope is smaller than the rising edge of the input waveform.

  A T terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting a time-out reset function for signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. Setting the T terminal to L (low) sets the timeout reset function to an invalid state, and setting the terminal to H (high) sets the timeout reset function to an enabled state.

  When the T terminal is set to H (high) and the time-out reset function is enabled, the clock signal and data are input from the CLK / I terminal and the DATA / I terminal, and the signal output is output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. After the start, when a predetermined period (1 second in this example) elapses, it is assumed that a time-out has occurred, and the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are automatically reset (output stopped). Therefore, when the time-out reset function is set to the valid state, if it is desired to continuously supply signals to the LEDs and the operation motor from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, for example, at least from the production control microcomputer 90120. It is necessary to repeatedly output a control signal every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second).

  A Q / S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting a drive system of signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. When the Q / S terminal is set to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs. Further, when the Q / S terminal is set to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be the sync output.

  The Q / I terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting whether to invert the output logic of signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. When the Q / I terminal is set to L (low), the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be normally output without being inverted. When the Q / I terminal is set to H (high), the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted.

  The R terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a current reference setting terminal. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47, the R terminal is connected to each of the drive output terminals A0 to A23 via a constant current circuit, and an external resistor having an arbitrary resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). By connecting resistors, it is possible to set the drive current values of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 within a predetermined range (for example, 4 mA to 20 mA).

  The VP terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a protective electrostatic protection terminal. A power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal. That is, if a power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal, an overvoltage higher than the power supply voltage can be released. When a plurality of types of power supply voltages are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the power supply voltage having the higher voltage value may be connected to the VP terminal.

  Next, the control data format of data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control data format. The basic control data format of data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit is composed of the common format shown in FIG. 50 (1) and the basic format shown in FIG. 50 (2).

  As shown in FIG. 50 (1), the common format includes a 9-bit header (HD), a 4-bit device ID (ID), a 5-bit decode address AD0 to AD4 (see FIGS. 47 and 48), and 1 Consists of bit EX data. The EX data is for setting whether the control data format following the common format is a basic format or an extended format described later, and EX = 0 is set in the basic format.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (2), the basic format includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. For example, when transmitting data for LED lighting control, by setting and transmitting 6-bit data in time series for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, the lighting control including LED gradation control is performed. It can be carried out.

  As the control data format, an extended format can be used instead of the basic format shown in FIG. Specifically, if EX = 1 is set in the common format shown in FIG. 50 (1), the control data format following the common format becomes the extended format shown in FIG. 50 (3).

  As shown in FIG. 50 (3), the extended format includes 1-bit binary data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the extended format, the data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is composed of 1 bit, so that the control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit can be reduced. For example, if the operation motor is driven and controlled using a serial-parallel conversion circuit, gradation control and the like need not be performed unlike the case where lighting control of a light emitter such as an LED is performed. It is effective to use an extended format as shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 50, the control data format used for the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described. However, in the control data format used for the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, for example, the common control data format shown in FIG. The difference is that the format includes 6-bit decode addresses AD0 to AD5. Further, for example, the basic format shown in FIG. 50 (2) is different in that it is short because it includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels. Further, for example, the extended format shown in FIG. 50 (3) is different in that it is short because it includes binary data of 1 bit for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels.

  Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is configured so that the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is dispersed to spread the spectrum, thereby preventing radiation noise and suppressing radio wave radiation. . FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. In this embodiment, a 6 MHz clock signal is output from the internal oscillation clock circuit incorporated in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51, the 6 MHz internal clock signal is converted to a 1 MHz 6-phase clock signal. The drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, group 1 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q0 to Q3, group 2 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q4 to Q7, and drive output terminals Q8 to Q8. Group 3 is composed of four channels Q11, group 4 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q12 to Q15, group 5 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q16 to Q19, and drive output terminals Q20 to Q23. Group 6 is composed of four channels. As shown in FIG. 51, the drive output terminals in the same group (for example, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 in the group 1) have the same signal output timing, but the drive output terminals ( For example, the output timing is distributed between the drive output terminal Q0 of group 1 and the drive output terminal Q4) of group 2.

  In FIG. 51, the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described. The signals are separated into three-phase clock signals, and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are grouped into three groups of four channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

  Next, a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51 is used as the light emitter driver 90411, the motor driver 909042, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c will be described. 52 to 54 are explanatory diagrams for explaining connection examples of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Among these, FIG. 52 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter driver 90411 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. FIG. 53 shows a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 90412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. FIG. 54 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c.

  First, a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a light emitter driver 90411 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 52, in this embodiment, a light emitter driver 90411 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. The

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD4, AD0 and AD1 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD2 to AD4 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 00001 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. FIG. 52 is an example, and since the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 include a plurality of light emitter drivers, different decode addresses are set for each light emitter driver.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, all the light emitter drivers 90411 for controlling the lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are mounted on the same light emitter control board 9016C. Since the transmission of the control signal between the illuminant drivers is performed on the same illuminant control board 9016C (transmission across the board is not performed), it is not necessary to worry about the resistance to noise. In view of this, by setting the through output of the clock signal and the data to a low slew rate output, the radio wave radiation from the substrate is rather suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). Accordingly, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set so as to be normally output without being inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, the power supply voltage VCL (5 V) is connected to the VP terminal, and protection is performed so as to release an overvoltage of 5 V or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are connected to a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. In the example shown in FIG. 52, for the sake of convenience, a diagram in which one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal is shown. However, when a color LED is connected as a light emitter, it is used for RGB. You may comprise so that three terminals may be connected to one color LED, and if a single color LED is used as a light-emitting body, you may comprise so that one terminal may be connected to one single color LED. . Further, for example, a plurality of single color LEDs may be connected in series to one terminal.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, the case where the light emitters are connected to all of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is shown. However, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q0 are changed according to the number and arrangement of the light emitters. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q23, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

  Next, a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the motor drive driver 90412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 53, in this embodiment, the motor drive driver 90412 for controlling the driving of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5, AD0 to AD2 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD3 to AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 000111 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. FIG. 53 is an example, and other values may be set as the decode address.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (1), since the control signal is not transmitted between the motor drive driver 90412 and another driver, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). Connection (set to L (low)) may be set so that the through output of the clock signal and data becomes the output of the normal slew rate.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to become sink outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to H (high). Thus, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, the power supply voltage VCC (5 V) is connected to the VP terminal, and protection is performed so as to release an overvoltage of 5 V or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the four channel terminals Q0 to Q3 of the group 1 having the same output timing are connected to the first operation motor 9060A. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing are connected to the second operation motor 9060B. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q8 to Q1 of the group 3 having the same output timing are connected to the third operation motor 9060C.

  As already described, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is distributed by being grouped into three groups of groups 1-3. If the output timing differs between signals output to the same operating motor, the driving accuracy of the operating motor may not be maintained. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the signals input to the same operation motor are connected to the drive output terminals belonging to the same group, and the drive accuracy of the operation motor is thus set. It prevents the situation that can not be maintained.

  On the contrary, for example, when connecting to the light emitters of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 described in FIG. 52, or when connecting to the top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, and right frame LED 909c of FIG. In the case of connecting to the light source, since the problem of the driving accuracy as described above does not occur, even if the output timing is different among the signals output to the respective light emitters, it does not cause much trouble. Therefore, when the output signal from the drive output terminal is connected to a light emitter such as an LED, there is no need to worry about the output timing.

  Next, a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 54, in this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. The

  54, among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5, AD0 to AD3 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD4 and AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 001111 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. FIG. 54 is an example, and there are three light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c. Therefore, different decode addresses are set for the respective light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the S terminal to L (low), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the normal slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are different light emitter control boards 9016D. Since the control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers mounted on ˜9016F and mounted on different substrates, the influence of noise is large. Thus, the clock signal and data through output is set to a normal slew rate output so as to ensure resistance to noise.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 54, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). Accordingly, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is set so as to be normally output without being inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54, the power supply voltage VDL (12 V) is connected to the VP terminal. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 54, a 12V power supply voltage (VDL) and a 5V power supply voltage (VCL, VCC) are used for the serial-parallel conversion circuit. The power supply voltage VDL is connected to the V terminal and is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 12V or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54, each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11 is connected to a plurality of light emitters as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c. In the example shown in FIG. 54, for convenience, one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal, or three light emitters (for example, single color LEDs) that perform the same control are connected in series. However, when a color LED is connected as a light emitter, three terminals for RGB may be connected to one color LED.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54, the case where the light emitters are connected to all of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is shown. However, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q0 are changed according to the number and arrangement of the light emitters. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q11, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, in this embodiment, the T terminals of the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are set to H (high), respectively, and the time-out function is effective. Set to state. In this embodiment, for example, the effect control microcomputer 90120 includes a plurality of light emitters, top frame LEDs 909a, left frame LEDs 909b, which constitute the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in effect control process processing (see step S9065) described later. A control signal for controlling lighting of the right frame LED 909c is output, or a control signal for controlling driving of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is output. However, since the timeout function is set to an effective state. When the control signal is output only once, the output signal from each drive output terminal is automatically reset after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) has elapsed, and lighting control and drive control cannot be continued. Therefore, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 90120 repeatedly outputs a control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) in, for example, the later-described production control process (see step S9065). Accordingly, the lighting control of the plurality of light emitters and the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is continuously executed, and the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is continued. It is controlled to be executed.

  In this embodiment, the time-out function is set to the valid state as described above, and the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, the light emitter driver every predetermined period (1 second in this example). Since the output from the drive output terminals 90413a to 90413c is automatically stopped, for example, after the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is performed, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C are stopped. In spite of the control, it is possible to prevent the operation motors 9060A to 9060C from being stopped due to a signal loss or malfunction, and the operation motors 9060A to 9060C being burned. .

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the case where the T terminal is uniformly set to H (high) and the time-out function is set to the valid state is shown. However, the setting of the valid state and invalid state of the timeout function may be properly used according to the usage. For example, for the motor drive driver, while setting the time-out function to an effective state from the viewpoint of preventing burn-in of the operation motor, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right Unlike the operation motors 9060A to 9060C, there is no problem such as burn-in with respect to the light emitters such as the frame LED 909c. Also good.

  In this embodiment, in order to continuously execute lighting control and drive control, the production control microcomputer 90120 repeatedly outputs a control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second). Although shown, it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, an output circuit (output IC) is provided separately from the effect control microcomputer 90120 (may be provided on the effect control board 9012 or on another board such as the effect control relay board 9016A), When the production control microcomputer 90120 outputs the control signal once, the output circuit repeatedly outputs the control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) based on the control signal output once. You may comprise as follows.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), and the T terminal is physically set to H (high) on the hardware so that time-out occurs. Although the case where the reset function is set to the valid state is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, by connecting the T terminal to the T terminal setting register and changing the set value of the register by a setting signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120, the time-out function is enabled or disabled in software. You may comprise so that it can set.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value (10 kΩ in this example) is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND), and the drive output terminal Q0. The drive current values of all outputs of .about.Q23 and Q0 to Q11 are set to 15 mA. Here, since a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) having an internal reference resistance also exists, the serial-parallel conversion circuit having such an internal reference resistance is used as a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver. It can be considered that the internal reference resistor is used, but in general, the built-in reference resistor included in the serial-parallel conversion circuit has a fixed driving current value (for example, fixed 20 mA) or a large error (for example, Error ± 30%). Therefore, in this embodiment, by connecting an external resistor between the R terminal and the ground (GND) and using an external reference resistor, an appropriate driving current value (15 mA in this example) is set, An error is also suggested (in this example, an error of ± 3%).

  In addition, as a light emitter driver and a motor drive driver, a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) that can use both an internal reference resistor and an external reference resistor can be used depending on the application. May be. For example, when a plurality of light emitters such as LEDs are densely provided, such as the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in this embodiment, an effect is produced when light emission is sparse. Therefore, an error may be reduced by using an external reference resistor. On the other hand, when controlling the lighting of an LED that is used independently, such as for error notification, there is no such obstacle in production, and the error may be somewhat large, so an internal reference resistor is used. Also good.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the electrical components (in this example, the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, the movable member) In accordance with a control signal for controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating 9051 to 9054 (in this example, the production control microcomputer 90120), and a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means, Output means (in this example, a light emitter driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, a specific signal (in this example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electrical component, Luminous body drivers 90413a to 90413c). The output means outputs the output state when the input control signal is output to the other output means in a first output state in which the waveform rises in a change manner equal to or higher than that of the input control signal (in this example, a normal output state). The output state can be set to either the output state of the slew rate) or the second output state (in this example, the output state of the low slew rate) in which the waveform rises more slowly than the first output state. (In this example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate). Therefore, the setting can be changed according to the use environment, and the radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed according to the setting, while the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. Specifically, if it is set to a low slew rate output state, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed, and if it is set to a normal slew rate output state, the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (in this example, as shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of light emitter drivers are provided on the light emitter control board 9016C. And control signals are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board 9016C). In this case, the output means is set to the second output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is H ( High) and low slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means are provided in the same substrate, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided on another board connected via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) to the board on which the output means is provided ( In this example, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, and are mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F having different control signals. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c. In this case, the output means is set to the first output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 54, S is used in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F. The terminal is set to L (low) and set to the normal slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means is provided on another substrate connected via the wiring member, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the circuit board generally has high noise resistance. Therefore, in the connection relation in the circuit board, priority is given to suppression of radio wave radiation and the output state is set to a low slew rate to obtain a gentle signal waveform. On the other hand, wiring members connected between boards (for example, flexible cables and wire harnesses) have low noise resistance, so in an abandoned relationship between circuit boards, priority is given to noise resistance and rectangular waves are output as normal slew rates. The signal waveform is close to. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to increase noise resistance of a control signal for preventing malfunction while suppressing radio wave radiation to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V) or the ground (GND), and the S terminal is physically H on the hardware. (High) is set to the low slew rate output state, or L (low) is set to the normal slew rate output state. It cannot be caught. For example, the S terminal is connected to the S terminal setting register, and the setting value of the register is changed by a setting signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120, so that a low slew rate output state is achieved in terms of software. You may comprise so that it can set whether it is set as the output state of a slew rate.

  Further, in this embodiment, transmission of a control signal according to a low slew rate output state between output means (in this example, light emitter drivers) mounted on the same board, or output means mounted on different boards In this example, a substrate (in this example, the light emitter control substrates 9016C to 9016F) that performs only one of the transmissions of the control signal according to the normal slew rate output state is provided. It cannot be caught. For example, when a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on one light emitter control board, a control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board. In addition, it may be configured such that a control signal is transmitted to a light emitter driver mounted on another light emitter control board. In this case, for example, even if the light emitter driver is mounted on the same light emitter control board, the one that transmits the control signal between the light emitter drivers is set to the low slew rate output state, and the other light emitters are set. A device that outputs a control signal to the light-emitting driver mounted on the control board may be configured to be set to a normal slew rate output state.

  Also, even when a control signal is transmitted between light emitter drivers mounted on the same light emitter control board, the output state is not necessarily set to a low slew rate. When a control signal output from one mounted light emitter driver is branched on the substrate, the output state may be set to a normal slew rate. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification in the case where a control signal output by one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitter control board is branched on the board.

  55, a control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one light emitter driver 90413d mounted on the light emitter control board 9016G is branched on the board, and one of the branches is branched. The control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 90413e on the same light emitter control board 9016G, and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413f on the same light emitter control board 9016G. As shown in the first modification, even when the control signal is branched and transmitted to the other light emitter drivers 90413e and 90413f even on the same light emitter control board 9016G, the control signal is attenuated by the branch. And is susceptible to noise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55, the S terminal may be set to L (low) to be set to the normal slew rate output state to increase the noise resistance of the control signal.

  In Modification 2 shown in FIG. 55, a control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one light emitter driver 90413g mounted on the light emitter control board 9016H is branched on the board, and one of the branched branches The control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 90413h on the same light emitter control board 9016H, and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver (not shown) on the external light emitter control board (not shown). The case is shown. As shown in the second modification, even when the other branched control signal is transmitted to the external board, the control signal is attenuated by the branch and easily affected by noise, as in the first modification. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55, the S terminal may be set to L (low) to be set to the normal slew rate output state to increase the noise resistance of the control signal.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the output means specifies from the specific signal output units (in this example, the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped into a plurality of different groups by the parallel communication method. 51 (in this example, output signals from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) (in this example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, one group as shown in FIG. In other words, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, each group is divided into three groups of four channels). And the output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (in this example, as shown in FIG. 51, the output timing of the output signals from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11 is a group. Everywhere). Therefore, the output timing of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 can be dispersed to spread the spectrum, prevent the generation of radiation noise, and further suppress the radio wave radiation from the substrate. .

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the movable member (in this example, the movable members 9051 to 9054) that performs the operation is provided. Further, the driving means for operating the movable member (in this example, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C) are driven based on the specific signal output from the specific signal output unit of the same group of the output means (in this example, As shown in FIG. 53, signals input to the same operation motor are connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the output unit stops the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) after inputting the control signal (in this example, the time-out function). (In this example, the time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high), see FIG. 48). For this reason, it is possible to avoid malfunctions due to wiring problems and to control the electrical components stably.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal is provided (in this example, the production control microcomputer 90120 is, for example, production control process processing (see step S9065)). In the above, by repeatedly outputting a control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example), the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c The lighting control is continuously executed or the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is continuously executed). Therefore, it is possible to realize control corresponding to the stop function of the output means.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (in this example, the timeout function is set to the invalid state by setting the T terminal to L (low)). The time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high) (see FIG. 48). Therefore, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce the cost by sharing parts.

  Next, control of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is fired based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing in the pachinko gaming machine 901. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the apparatus. When this game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A, the first is based on the fact that the game ball has been detected by the first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The start condition is met. Thereafter, the first start condition is established based on, for example, the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. In this way, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started.

  When the game ball launched toward the game area passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Is done. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, the second start condition is satisfied. Thereafter, the second start condition is established based on, for example, the end of the last special game or the big hit gaming state. In this way, the special figure game using the second special figure is executed by the second special symbol display device 904B. When the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the normally open state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning hole.

  In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, based on the fact that the normal symbol variable display result by the normal symbol display 9020 is "per normal figure", the opening control or expansion opening where the movable wing piece of the electric tulip is in the tilting position is performed. Control is performed, and closing control and normal opening control for returning to the vertical position when a predetermined time elapses are performed. When the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B is in the expanded and opened state as the first variable state by the opening control and the expanding and opening control, the game ball can easily pass or can pass through the second start winning opening. The normal figure starting condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 is established based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. After the normal chart start condition is satisfied, the normal symbol display 9020 uses a normal symbol display 9020 based on the fact that the general map start condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. The figure game is started. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”.

  When the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A is started or when the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B is started It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is set to “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is a game control microcomputer 90100 on the main board 9011 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 9012.

  After the special game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, “left”, “middle”, “right” arranged on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R, variable display of decorative symbols (effect symbols) different from the special symbols is performed. The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are also referred to as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, respectively.

  In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the special graphic game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B, a confirmed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, the main image display device 905MA derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol. As a special symbol variable display result, when a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is “big hit” (specific display result), and when a predetermined lose symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is “Lose” (non-specific display result). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, whether or not the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed.

  When the variable display result of the special symbol in the special game is “big hit”, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. As an example, if the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the winning combination is confirmed. It is only necessary that the decorative design is derived and displayed.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is opened, and the special variable winning ball device 907 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, in a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the grand prize opening and a winning ball is generated, the grand prize opening is continuously opened. The round game (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big winning opening, the winning ball switch 9023 detects the winning ball, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of gaming balls are paid out as the winning ball for each detection. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “16”) is reached. Therefore, in the big hit gaming state, the player can acquire a large number of prize balls very easily, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 901 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  After the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes a probable state based on the fact that the predetermined probability variation control condition is satisfied, and the probability that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (big hit probability) is higher than the normal state. Control may take place. In the probability change state, a predetermined probability change end condition is satisfied, for example, a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a big hit gaming state is started before the number of executions of the variable display reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next big hit gaming state is started regardless of the number of executions of variable display. After the big hit gaming state is finished, the gaming state becomes a short time state, and the short time control may be performed in which the average variable display time becomes shorter than the normal state. In the short-time state, a predetermined short-time end condition is satisfied, for example, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or the big hit gaming state is started before the variable display execution number reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until

  In the probability variation state and the short time state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B is in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening than the normal state. And a second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display 9020 can control the normal symbol change time (normal diagram change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is higher than in the normal state, and the variable display result is “per normal figure”. By changing the length of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous manner by controlling the length of the ball to be longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as “high opening control” (also referred to as “high base control”). By controlling to such a probable change state and a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and the “special game state” (“advantage game” which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is reduced. Also referred to as “state”). Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

  In the main image display device 905MA, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are stopped in a state in which they match the jackpot combination continuously for a predetermined time. A big hit occurs before the final result is displayed due to fluctuation, enlargement / reduction, or deformation, or when multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol changes. An effect performed in a state where the possibility continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as “reach state”) is referred to as “reach effect”. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as “reach mode”. Furthermore, the variable display including the reach effect is referred to as “reach variable display”. A plurality of types of reach modes are prepared in advance corresponding to the decorative pattern variation pattern, etc., and the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (a big hit expectation) differs depending on the reach mode. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In the reach production, it is only necessary to include a normal reach production and a super reach reach production with a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than the normal reach production. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA is not a big hit combination, it is “lost”, and the variability display state ends.

  As an effect of liquid crystal display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, variable display of decorative symbols is performed. In addition, on the screens of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, for example, an effect using a character image, or an effect of displaying a notification image based on the determination result of the big hit determination and the variation pattern is executed. The Various effects executed during variable display in which variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is performed are also referred to as “variable display effects”. As an example of effects during variable display, there is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state will reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the decorative display variable display operation, the possibility that a super reach reach effect will be executed, variable display A notice effect may be executed to suggest to the player in advance that the result may be a “hit”.

  The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. May be executed (started) prior to the reach state (before the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. In this way, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols until the fixed special symbols and fixed decorative symbols that result in variable display are derived. Anything that can give notice of sex is acceptable. A plurality of notice effect patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation (effect mode) when such a notice effect is executed.

  When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B and the variable display result is “lost”, the variable display mode is “non-reach” (“normal” A case where the variable display mode is “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”). When the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display state of the decorative design is not reached after the variable display of the decorative design is started. Reach combination) is stopped (derived). When the variable display mode is “reach”, the reach display is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. A predetermined combination of decorative symbols (reach-miss combination) that is not to be displayed is stopped (derived).

  The game ball used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the recorded information of the score given corresponding to the number of the game balls have value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. That's fine. Alternatively, these game balls and score recording information may have valuable values that can be used for replaying with the pachinko gaming machine 901, although they cannot be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes.

  In addition, the gaming value that can be given in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to paying out a gaming ball as a winning ball or giving a score. Control, the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit gaming state becomes the first round number (for example, “15”) larger than the second round number (for example, “7”), can be executed in a short time state The upper limit number of variable display becomes a first number (for example, “100”) larger than the second number (for example, “50”), and the big hit probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The first probability (for example, 1/20), the number of consecutive chunks, which is the number of times of repeated control to the big hit gaming state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive number of chunks (for example, “5”). Such part or all of it to be the first communication Chang number (e.g. "10"), it may include be a more favorable game situation for the player.

  For example, a NAND-ROM is used as part or all of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C mounted on the effect control board 9012 as shown in FIGS. The stored contents may be rewritable. Such a rewritable memory may include a data area and a redundant area. The data area stores programs and data for executing various processes in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901. The redundant area has an alternative area to be used in place of the defective area in the data area. The CPU 90130 and the VDP 90140 execute various processes based on the data stored in the data area and the data stored in the alternative area used in place of the defective area generated in the data area. Memory redundancy information may be stored in such a redundant area of the memory. The history information may be information related to memory recycling. As an example, the history information may include at least one of model identification information such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 in which a memory has been used and date information. In addition, the history information may include store identification information for each amusement store where the memory has been used. By storing history information in the redundant area of the memory in this way, there is no need to attach a barcode for recycling management outside the memory, and it is accurately recycled based on the history information stored in the memory. Management can be performed. Since the history information is stored in the redundant area, the history information does not affect the data area normally used, and the identity of the program and data can be ensured.

  Alternatively, the rewritable memory may include a control area that stores correspondence information indicating a correspondence relation between a defective area in the data area and an alternative area in the redundant area. The control area may store arrangement information indicating the storage position of the history information in the redundant area. Alternatively, a memory control unit that stores correspondence information and reads data based on the correspondence information is built in the memory, and the memory control unit is an arrangement that indicates a storage position of history information in the redundant area. Information may be stored. As described above, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the defective area in the data area and the alternative area in the redundant area is stored, and the arrangement information indicating the storage position of the history information is stored, thereby reading data from the alternative area. Similarly to the above, it is possible to appropriately manage the reading of history information.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

  In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 90103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. Game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, gaming random number update processing, game control process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in pachinko gaming machine 901. Processing for controlling the progress of the process is included.

  The switch processing is processing for determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 via the switch circuit 90110. The main-side error process is a process for making an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 9011 side by software.

  In the game control process included in the game control timer interrupt process, the value of the game process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A or Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the second special symbol display device 904B and setting of opening / closing operation of the big prize opening in the special variable winning ball device 907 in a predetermined procedure. In the normal symbol process, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED), variable display of the normal symbol, setting of the tilting operation of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B, and the like. It is a process that enables.

  The command control process is a process for transmitting a control command from the main board 9011 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012. As an example, in the command control processing, the output control board 9012 among the output ports included in the I / O 90105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 90102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. This makes it possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control process. In the game control process shown in FIG. 56, the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 first determines whether or not a start win has occurred (step S9011). As an example, in step S9011, the input state (on or off) of a start winning signal that is a detection signal transmitted from the first start port switch 9022A or the second start port switch 9022B is checked. What is necessary is just to determine with winning.

  If a start winning is generated in step S9011 (step S9011; Yes), a winning random number is stored (step S9012). As an example, in the process of step S9012, a random number circuit 90104 built in (or externally attached to) the game control microcomputer 90100, a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100, and the game control microcomputer In a computer 90100, a random number configured by using an internal register provided separately from the RAM 90102, etc., is updated at least in part by a game random number (random value for determining a variable display result, game state determination A part or all of the numerical data indicating the random number and the random number for determining the variation pattern) is extracted. The random number value extracted at this time may be stored as hold data associated with the hold number in a hold random number storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100, for example.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S9012, various control commands corresponding to the start winning prize are transmitted (step S9013). As an example, in the process of step S <b> 9013, setting for transmitting a start winning designation command for notifying the occurrence of a start winning to the effect control board 9012 may be performed. If no start prize has been generated in step S9011 (step S9011; No), after executing the process of step S9013, the value of the game process flag is determined (step S9021). Then, a process corresponding to the determination value is selected from a plurality of processes previously described in the game control computer program and executed.

  For example, when the value of the game process flag is “0”, it is determined whether or not variable symbol display (variable display game) can be started (step S90101). As an example, in the process of step S90101, it is determined whether or not the number of hold of the variable display game is “0” by checking the storage content of the hold random number storage unit. At this time, if the number of hold is other than “0”, the variable display is started because the start of the variable display has been satisfied and the variable display has not been started yet. Determine that it is possible. On the other hand, when the hold number is “0”, it is determined that variable display cannot be started. When the variable display cannot be started (step S90101; No), the game control process is terminated.

  When variable display can be started in step S90101 (step S90101; Yes), a fixed symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result is determined (step S90102). The variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is referred to as “special figure display result”. In the process of step S90102, the game random number (random number for determining the variable display result, random number for determining the game state, fluctuation, etc.) stored in the head (storage area with the smallest hold number) in the hold random number value storage unit Read random number for pattern determination). The game random number read from the holding random value storage unit may be temporarily stored in a variable display random number buffer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100. Then, using a random value for determining the variable display result and the variable display result determination table, it is determined at a predetermined ratio whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. Here, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in a probable variation state, the variable display result determination table is set so that the variable display result is determined as “big hit” at a higher rate than in the normal state or the short time state. It is sufficient that the determination value is set.

  When the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” in the process of step S90102, the game state after the end of the big hit gaming state is further changed using the random number value for determining the gaming state and the gaming state determination table. Decide whether or not to enter the special gaming state. Corresponding to these determination results, a fixed symbol derived and displayed as a variable display result may be determined.

  Following the processing in step S90102, an internal flag and the like are set (step S90103). As an example, in the process of step S90103, when the variable display result is determined as “big hit” in the process of step S90102, the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 is turned on. set. Further, when it is determined that the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is to be a probability variation state, a probability variation confirmation flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set to an on state, for example. In addition, it may be stored in such a way that it can be specified that the state is likely to change. Thereafter, the value of the game process flag is updated to “1” (step S90104), and the game control process process is terminated.

  When the value of the game process flag is “1”, a variation pattern or the like is determined (step S90111). FIG. 57 shows a setting example of a variation pattern used in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Each variation pattern indicates that the required time (variable display time) from the start of variable display to the display of a fixed symbol that is a variable display result can be specified and the outline of the production mode can be specified. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the main image display device 905MA is “non-reach” and “reach”. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of the above and the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. For the variation pattern, a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance for each variation time (variable display time) in the variable display of the special figure game or the decorative design. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern, it is possible to determine the variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols.

  In the processing of step S90111, the variation pattern to be used is determined at a predetermined rate using the variation pattern determination random value temporarily stored in the variable display random number buffer and the variation pattern determination table. At this time, the variable display result may become “big hit” corresponding to each fluctuation pattern by changing the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern depending on whether or not the variable display result is decided as “big hit” (Big hit reliability) can be varied.

  In the process of step S90111, it may be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “reach” by determining a variation pattern when the variable display result is determined to be “losing”. . Alternatively, prior to determining the variation pattern, it may be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to “reach” by using the reach determination random number value and the reach determination table. That is, in the process of step S90111, it is only necessary to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the variable display result and the determination result of reach.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S9011, various control commands corresponding to the start of variable display are transmitted (step S90112). As an example, in the process of step S90112, as a variable display start command for designating the start of variable display, a variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result, variable display such as decorative pattern variable display time and reach effect type, etc. A setting for transmitting a variation pattern designation command for notifying a variation pattern indicating a mode may be performed. Further, in response to the decrease in the hold count due to the start of variable display, a setting for transmitting a hold count notification command for notifying the hold count after the decrease may be performed.

  The variable display time is set in response to the change pattern being determined by the process of step S90112. Moreover, the setting for starting the variable display of the special symbol by either the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B may be performed. As an example, variable display of symbols may be started by transmitting a predetermined drive signal to either the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. Which special symbol display device using the special symbol on which special symbol display device is to be executed is a special symbol game based on whether the game ball has passed through the first start winning port or the second starting winning port It may be set accordingly. More specifically, a special game is played by the first special symbol display device 904A based on the game ball passing through the first start winning opening. On the other hand, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second start winning opening, a special game is played by the second special symbol display device 904B. Thereafter, the value of the game process flag is updated to “2” (step S90113), and the game control process process is terminated.

  When the value of the game process flag is “2”, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step S90121). If the variable display time has not elapsed (step S90121; No), the special symbol variable display control is performed (step S90122), and the game control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the variable display time has elapsed (step S90121; Yes), the variable symbol special display is stopped, and the control for deriving and displaying the fixed symbol is performed (step S90123).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S90123, various control commands corresponding to the end of variable display are transmitted (step S90124). As an example, in the process of step S90124, a variable display end command for instructing the end (stop) of variable display, or a big hit start specifying command (fanfare command for specifying the start of a big hit gaming state when the variable display result is “big hit”. ) And the like may be set for transmission.

  After executing the process of step S90124, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” (step S90125). If the variable display result is “big hit” (step S90125; Yes), the value of the game process flag is updated to “3” (step S90126), and the game control process is terminated. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “losing” instead of “big hit” (step S90125; No), the game process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to “0” (step S90125). S90127), the game control process is terminated. When the process of step S90127 is executed, it is determined whether or not the probability variation state or the time saving state is to be ended. When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the gaming state is ended. Settings for controlling to a normal state may be performed.

  When the value of the game process flag is “3”, it is determined whether or not to end the big hit gaming state according to whether or not a predetermined big hit end condition is satisfied (step S90131). The jackpot end condition may be, for example, that all rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state have ended. When the big hit game state is not ended (step S90131; No), the game operation control at the time of the big hit is performed (step 132), and the game control process is ended. On the other hand, when ending the big hit gaming state (step S90131; Yes), the setting for controlling the gaming state after the big hit ending is performed (step S90133).

  As an example, in the process of step S90133, it is determined whether or not the probability change confirmation flag is on. If it is on, the probability change flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 is turned on. Set to. Thus, when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, and it is decided that the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is to be a probable change state, a game corresponding to this decision result is made. It is possible to control the state to a certain change state. Even in the case of controlling to the short time state, a setting corresponding to this may be performed. Then, after clearing the game process flag and initializing its value to “0” (step S90134), the game control process process is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 9012 will be described. The effect control board 9012 receives supply of power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like. In the effect control microcomputer 90120 in which the power supply for activation is started, the CPU 90130 executes effect control main processing.

  In this embodiment, in the effect control main process, the memory test process may be executed when a predetermined memory test condition is satisfied. The memory inspection process is a determination process for determining whether or not the programs and data stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are normal. In the memory inspection process, a checksum process is executed as a determination process, whereby the storage contents of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are inspected, and the checksum that is the inspection result can be displayed. The effect control main process includes a process for controlling effects by various effect devices, such as an effect control process executed based on the occurrence of a timer interrupt for effect control.

  In the production control main process, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be confirmed when a predetermined origin confirmation condition is satisfied. The origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 are positions corresponding to the retracted state as shown in FIG. 38A, for example, and each of the movable members 9051 and 9052 is disposed above the main image display device 905MA. Each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 may be determined in advance as a position where the movable members 9053 and 9054 are disposed below the main image display device 905MA. When the origin confirmation condition is satisfied, an initial operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is executed, and control for setting each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 to the origin position is performed. At this time, based on the result of detecting the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like by the movable member position sensor 9061, it is confirmed whether or not the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be stopped at the origin position. And when it cannot be made to stop at an origin position, abnormality notification is performed noting that origin abnormality has occurred.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control main process executed by the CPU 90130. In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58, the CPU 90130 first checks the connection state of the board (step S9051). In step S9051, for example, it is specified whether or not the effect control board 9012 is connected to the main board 9011 and whether or not the effect control board 9012 is connected to the effect control relay board 9016A. In order to confirm the connection with the main board 9011, the CPU 90130 may determine whether an initialization command or a power recovery command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received after starting the time measurement by the internal timer. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of timing without receiving an initialization command or a power supply restoration command, it is only necessary to determine that the effect control board 9012 and the main board 9011 are not connected.

  FIGS. 59A and 59B show configuration examples for connecting the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A. As shown in FIG. 59A, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are physically connected to the effect control board 9012 by inserting a connector (plug) provided at one end of the harness HN1. In addition, a connector (socket) CN1 for electrical connection is provided. As shown in FIG. 59B, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are inserted into the effect control relay board 9016A by inserting a connector (plug) provided at the other end of the harness HN1. A connector (socket) CN2 is provided for physically and electrically connecting the two. The harness HN1 only needs to be configured by binding a number of wiring cables. The connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 includes terminals TM01 to TM24. The connector CN11 provided on the effect control relay board 9016A includes terminals TN01 to TN24. The terminals TM01 to TM24 included in the connector CN01 and the terminals TN01 to TN24 included in the connector CN11 have corresponding numbers (for example, the terminal TM01 and the terminal TN01) when the harness HN1 is attached to the connector CN01 and the connector CN11. Any relationship that is physically and electrically connected is acceptable.

  FIG. 59C shows a setting example of input / output contents corresponding to terminals TM01 to TM24 provided in the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012. Terminals TM01 to TM24 included in the connector CN01 can provide various voltages such as ground (GND), VSL (AC24V is rectified and smoothed), VDL (DC12V), and VCL (DC5V). In addition, terminals TM01 to TM24 are terminals TM03 and TM04 that supply data signals and clock signals for driver ICs mounted on the drive control board 9016B and the light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F, and various data by a serial signal system. Terminals TM05 to TM08 for transmitting and receiving are included. Furthermore, a signal SM1 used for confirming connection with the effect control relay board 9016A can be input to the terminal TM22 among the terminals TM01 to TM24. As shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, the voltage of VCL output from the terminals TM20 and TM21 of the connector CN01 is the terminal of the connector CN11 provided on the effect control relay board 9016A via the harness HN1. It is supplied to TN20 and TN21. The terminals TN20 to TN22 of the connector CN11 may be short-circuited on the board of the effect control relay board 9016A. Therefore, when the harness HN1 is connected, a voltage corresponding to VCL is supplied from the terminal TN22 of the connector CN11 to the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 via the harness HN1. The On the other hand, when the harness HN1 is not connected, the voltage is not supplied to the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012.

  In step S9051 shown in FIG. 58, in order to confirm the connection state with the effect control relay board 9016A, the CPU 90130 determines the input state of the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012. If the signal SM1 is in a high voltage state corresponding to VCL, it is determined that the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected via the harness HN1. On the other hand, if the signal SM1 is in a low voltage state corresponding to no voltage supply, it is determined that the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. In this way, the connection state between the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A may be confirmed based on the voltage at the terminal TM22 serving as the connection check terminal.

  Based on the confirmation result of the connection state in step S9051, it is determined whether or not there is a connection with the effect control relay board 9016A (step S9052). In step S9052, when the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 is in a high voltage state corresponding to VCL, it is determined that there is a connection with the effect control relay board 9016A, whereas the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 corresponds to no voltage supply. What is necessary is just to determine that there is no connection with the production control relay board 9016A in the low voltage state. If it is determined in step S9052 that there is no connection (step S9052; No), the relay unconnected flag is set to an on state (step S9053). If the relay unconnected flag is prepared in advance in a work memory 90131 built in the effect control microcomputer 90120 or a predetermined area (such as an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 90122 externally attached to the effect control microcomputer 90120. Good. If it is determined in step S9052 that there is a connection, the relay unconnected flag is maintained in the OFF state by not performing the process of step S9053.

  Subsequently, based on the confirmation result of the connection state in step S9051, it is determined whether or not there is a connection with the main board 9011 (step S9054). In step S9054, it is determined that there is a connection with the main board 9011 when an initialization command or a power recovery command is received before a predetermined time elapses from the start of timing. What is necessary is just to determine with no connection with the main board | substrate 9011, when predetermined time passes, without receiving. In addition, it is not limited to what determines the presence or absence of a connection according to the presence or absence of command reception, but based on the voltage at a predetermined terminal serving as a connection confirmation terminal, as in the connection state with the effect control relay board 9016A It may be determined whether or not there is a connection with the substrate 9011. If it is determined in step S9054 that there is no connection (step S9054; No), the memory inspection process (step S9055) is executed, and then the loop process is executed to stand by.

  In this embodiment, when power supply is started in a state in which a harness that binds cables as command lines for transmitting various control signals between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 is not connected. The memory inspection condition is satisfied, and the memory inspection process is executed in step S9055. On the other hand, when the power supply is started in a state where the harness is connected between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012, the memory inspection condition is not satisfied, and the memory inspection process in step S9055 is not executed. In this manner, the memory inspection condition is established by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 with the cable (harness) serving as the command line attached between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 being removed. You may do it.

  Note that the memory inspection condition is not limited to that established when power is turned on with the command line disconnected, and is established, for example, when power is turned on while the push button 9031B is pressed. There may be. Alternatively, for example, the memory inspection condition may be satisfied by turning on the power in a state where the openable / closable gaming machine frame 903 is opened. In addition, the memory inspection condition may be satisfied by detecting a predetermined arbitrary state.

  In the memory inspection process in step S9055, a checksum calculation using the data stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is performed, and the calculation result or the like may be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. When the memory inspection process is executed, the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is temporarily turned off, and then the power switch is turned on again with the cable (harness) as the command line connected. The control can be performed. Alternatively, a cable (harness) as a command line may be connected and a reset switch may be pressed so that the production control can be performed without turning on the power again. Alternatively, after the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is once turned off, the power can be turned on in a state where the push button 9031B is not pressed, so that the effect can be controlled. In addition, when a predetermined effect control condition is satisfied, the process may proceed to step S9056 so that the effect can be controlled.

  If it is determined in step S9054 that there is a connection (step S9054; Yes), an initial setting process (step S9056) is executed. In the initial setting processing in step S9056, for example, the storage area in the RAM 90122 is cleared, various initial values are set, and a CTC (counter and timer circuit) register is set that generates a timer interrupt for effect control. This initial setting process may include an effect data transfer process. In the effect data transfer process, predetermined data (a binary code constituting a program module, etc.) among programs and data stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C and used to execute effects by various effect devices. Can be transferred to the RAM 90122, the VRAM 90141, or the like. Further, in the initial setting process, execution control of initial operations by the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 may be performed along with the transfer of the effect data by the effect data transfer process. The initial operation performed at this time is, for example, an operation in which the movable members 9051 to 9054 are changed (moved) from the retracted state to the advanced state, stopped in the advanced state until a predetermined time elapses, and then returned to the retracted state. And so on.

  After executing the initial setting process in step S9056, it is determined whether or not the relay unconnected flag is on (step S9057). If the relay unconnected flag is off (step S9057; No), the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like are confirmed in correspondence with the state-controlled relay board 9016A being connected ( Step S9058). In this case, it is determined whether or not there is an origin abnormality (step S9059). If there is an origin abnormality (step S9059; Yes), the origin abnormality is notified (step S9060), and the process returns to step S9058. In addition, after notifying of the origin abnormality in step S9060, the process may proceed to step S9061.

  In step S9058, for example, in order to confirm the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054, detection signals from the movable member position sensor 9061 are acquired as position detection signals of the movable members 9051 to 9054. The detection signal by the movable member position sensor 9061 indicates the result of detecting the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054. In the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 59A, the detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061 may be included in the signal input to the serial reception terminal TM07. The CPU 90130 confirms the detection signal by the movable member position sensor 9061 acquired by the general-purpose output controller 90145, and based on the position detection signals of the movable members 9051 to 9054, whether or not the movable members 9051 to 9054 are at the origin position. I just need to be able to confirm. The notification of the origin abnormality in step S9060 includes, for example, image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, or the top What can be executed by turning on a notification lamp provided separately from the frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c, a notification operation using other effect devices, or a combination of some or all of them If it is. Furthermore, the signal output from the specific terminal provided on the effect control board 9012 may be set to different output states depending on whether or not the origin is abnormal. As described above, the abnormality notification of the movable member may be realized by controlling an arbitrary output.

  If it is determined in step S9057 that the relay unconnected flag is on, the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 and the connector CN11 provided on the harness HN1 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected. The effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. In this case, the detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061 is not input to the terminal TM07 of the connector CN01. For this reason, even if the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like are confirmed, it is determined that the origin is abnormal, and an abnormality notification is executed. In particular, in the manufacturing stage and the development stage, for example, for the purpose of checking the operation of the production control microcomputer 90120, the power supply may be turned on when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are not connected. is there. In order to prevent frequent occurrence of abnormality notification in the manufacturing stage and the development stage and improve work efficiency, in response to the determination that the relay unconnected flag is turned on in step S9057, steps S9058 to S9060 are performed. Do not execute. Thereby, when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are not connected, the origin position of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is not confirmed, and the abnormality notification due to the occurrence of the origin abnormality is not executed. .

  When it is determined in step S9057 that the relay unconnected flag is on (step S9057; Yes), or when it is determined in step S9059 that there is no origin abnormality (step S9059; No), the effect control main In the process, an effect random number update process (step S9061) is executed, and numerical data indicating a random number value to be an effect random number is updated by software. The effect random number is counted as various random values used for effect control. It should be noted that the effect random number that is updated by hardware using a random number circuit built in (or externally attached to) the effect control microcomputer 90120 may not be updated in the effect random number update process. Alternatively, the rendering random number may be updated by software using numerical data indicating a random value updated by hardware.

  After performing the effect random number update process in step S9061, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9062). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state when a timer interrupt for effect control occurs. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9062; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S9063), command analysis processing (step S9064), and the effect control process The process (step S9065) is sequentially executed, and then the process returns to step S9061. The command analysis process in step S9064 and the effect control process in step S9065 are included in the timer interrupt process for effect control. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9062; No), the process returns to step S9061 without executing the processes of steps S9063 to S9065.

  FIG. 60 shows an example of execution of abnormality notification in step S9060 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the execution example shown in FIG. 60, the occurrence of the origin abnormality is notified by the image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. At this time, based on the position detection signal indicating the detection result by the movable member position sensor 9061, which of the upper mechanism (upper accessory) and the lower mechanism (lower accessory) in the effect movable mechanism 9050 is abnormal? May be displayed. As described above, in a notification mode in which a store clerk or the like of the game hall can recognize which type of anomaly is out of a plurality of types of anomalies configured using a plurality of movable members, the movable member Anomaly notification may be performed.

  Note that the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is difficult to view or cannot be viewed when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state. For this reason, when the abnormality notification of the movable member is given by the image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, there is a possibility that the store clerk or the like of the game hall may be difficult or impossible to recognize the occurrence of the abnormality. Therefore, with the image display by the main image display device 905MA or the like, or in place of the image display, using a notification unit that is visible regardless of the state of the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050, the abnormality notification of the movable member is performed. May be performed. As such a notification unit, for example, it is provided at the upper position, left position, or right position of the gaming machine frame 903, and is included in the top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, or top frame LED 909a or left A plurality of notification light emitting members provided separately from the frame LED 909b and the right frame LED 909c may be used. These notification light emitting members may be configured using, for example, LEDs. According to a combination of lighting modes by a plurality of light emitting members for notification, an abnormality notification of a movable member is performed in a notification mode in which a store clerk or the like of a game hall can recognize which kind of an anomaly has occurred. It may be. As an example, when the notification unit includes a first notification light emitting member and a second notification light emitting member, an abnormality occurs in the upper mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 in step S9060 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. For example, the lighting control of the notification unit may be performed so that the first notification light emitting member is turned on while the second notification light emitting member is turned on when an abnormality occurs in the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050. Thus, even if there is a configuration in which it is difficult or impossible to recognize depending on the state of the movable member by notifying the abnormality of the movable member by using the notification unit that can be recognized regardless of the state of the movable member, the movable member. It is possible to report in an identifiable manner that an abnormality has occurred and which movable member has an abnormality.

  The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 can execute an interrupt process for receiving a command in addition to a timer interrupt process for effect control, and can receive an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. As long as it can be acquired from the host interface 90132. The effect control command acquired at this time may be temporarily stored in a reception command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, for example. In the command analysis process in step S9064, it is determined whether or not an effect control command has been received. If there is a reception, setting or control corresponding to the received command is performed. In the production control process in step S9065, for example, production image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are arranged. Lighting on a plurality of arranged light emitters, lighting on various light emitting members such as top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c and decoration LED different from light emitter units 9071 to 9074, moving movable members 9051 to 9054 With respect to operation control contents using various effect devices such as drive operations of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed in accordance with the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011.

  FIG. 61A is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9055 of FIG. 58 as the memory inspection process. In the memory inspection process, as a checksum calculation using the storage data in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, the first checksum calculation using the storage data in a plurality of storage areas provided in the ROM 90121 and the storage data in the ROM 90121 The second checksum calculation using all of the above, the third checksum calculation using the storage data in the plurality of storage areas provided in the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and all of the storage data in the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C Of the fourth checksum calculation using, a part or all of the calculations may be executed. In this embodiment, after the second checksum operation is executed following the first checksum operation, an operation using all the stored data in each of the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is executed as the fourth checksum operation. Each calculation result is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA.

  In the memory inspection process shown in FIG. 61A, the CPU 90130 first sets a memory inspection setting table (step S90201). The memory check setting table is a table for setting a checksum calculation start address and a calculation end address by checksum calculation. The table data constituting the memory test setting table may be stored in advance in a predetermined area (for example, the first storage area) of the ROM 90121, for example.

  FIG. 61B shows a configuration example of the memory inspection setting table. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 61B, the checksum calculation start address and calculation end address are designated in correspondence with the display counts of “0” to “5”, respectively. The number of display times is the number of times the checksum is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. After “0” is set as the initial value, 1 is added each time the calculation result by the checksum calculation is displayed. You can do it.

  Subsequent to the setting in step S90201 shown in FIG. 61A, the display count is set to “0” (step S90202). For example, in step S90202, it is only necessary to set the display count value to “0” by clearing (initializing) a display count counter prepared in advance. The display number counter may be configured using a built-in register of the CPU 90130, or may be configured using a predetermined area (such as an effect control counter setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122.

  Thereafter, the parameter corresponding to the display count is set (step S90203). For example, in step S90203, the clear data is set in the checksum data area and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the checksum calculation end address is set to be comparable with the address indicated by the pointer. These parameters may be set in a plurality of registers built in the CPU 90130, or may be set in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122.

  A checksum is calculated using the parameters set in step S90203 (step S90204). For example, in step S90204, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the stored data at the addresses of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C indicated by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored as new storage data in the checksum data area, and it is determined whether or not the address indicated by the pointer value has reached the calculation end address. If the calculation end address has not been reached, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and processing returns to the exclusive OR operation. When the calculation end address is reached, the checksum using the stored data from the calculation start address to the calculation end address can be obtained by inverting the value of each bit that is the contents of the checksum data area. .

  Along with the checksum calculation in step S90204, it is determined whether or not the relay unconnected flag is on (step S90205). If the relay unconnected flag is on (step S90205; Yes), the calculation according to the display count is performed. The contents are updated and displayed (step S90206). Therefore, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the execution result of the checksum calculation is controlled so that it can be displayed. On the other hand, if the relay unconnected flag is off (step S90205; No), the process of step S90206 is not executed. As a result, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, control is performed so that the execution result of the checksum calculation is not displayed. In step S90206, the calculation contents are updated and displayed, and the determination result by the determination process for determining whether or not the effect data stored in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is normal is the main image display device 905MA. It can be displayed on the display device.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation is completed (step S90207). If the checksum calculation is not completed (step S90207; No), the process returns to step S90204 to continue the checksum calculation. If the calculation is completed in step S90207 (step S90207; Yes), the display count is incremented by 1 (step S90208), and then it is determined whether the display count has reached the end determination value (step S90209). ). By setting, for example, “6” as the end determination value in advance, six checksum calculation results can be displayed corresponding to the setting of the memory inspection setting table as shown in FIG. it can. If the end determination value has not been reached (step S90209; No), the process returns to step S90203, and if the end determination value has been reached, the memory inspection process ends.

  FIG. 62 shows a display example of the calculation result on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. In this display example, as the checksum calculation result corresponding to the setting of the memory inspection setting table as shown in FIG. Calculation results and the like are displayed, and three types of calculation results (A) to (C) are displayed for the “data ROM” corresponding to the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. In the display example of FIG. 62, the progress status (completion rate) of the checksum calculation and the presence / absence of an abnormality based on the calculation result are displayed so as to be confirmed. 62A corresponds to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA01 set when the display count is “0” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 61B. In the ROM 90121, the checksum is calculated using the storage data in the first storage area in which the program for effect control and various management data are stored. 62B of “Program ROM” shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the calculation start address MA02 and the calculation end address MA10 set when the display count is “1” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 61B. In the ROM 90121, the checksum is calculated using the storage data in the second storage area in which the audio data is stored. 62C of “Program ROM” shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA10 set when the display count is “2” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 61B. Thus, the checksum is calculated using all of the data stored in the ROM 90121. 62A corresponds to the calculation start address MA10 + 1 and the calculation end address MA20 set when the display count is “3” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 61B. Thus, the checksum is calculated using all the stored data in the effect data memory 90123A. 62B of “DATA ROM” shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the calculation start address MA20 + 1 and the calculation end address MA30 set when the display count is “4” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 61B. Thus, the checksum is calculated using all the stored data in the effect data memory 90123B. 62C corresponds to the calculation start address MA30 + 1 and the calculation end address MA40 set when the display count is “5” in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 61B. Thus, the checksum is calculated using all the stored data in the effect data memory 90123C.

  The checksum calculation result varies depending on the contents of the stored data in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, when the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are nonvolatile semiconductor memories that can be electrically erased, written, and rewritten, such as an EEPROM or a NAND-ROM, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C Different checksum calculation results can be obtained in accordance with the stored program for production control and various data versions. A memory check process as shown in FIG. 61A is executed to display the checksum calculation result on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, so that the ROM 90121 can be used in the manufacturing and development stages of the pachinko gaming machine 901. The effect control programs and various data versions stored in the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C can be easily confirmed. This facilitates version management of stored data in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and can reliably prevent, for example, inconsistency between the effect control program and the version of audio data, image data, and the like. In addition to the checksum calculation result, version information indicating the version of the program for effect control and various data may be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The version information may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. By displaying the version information along with the checksum calculation result, it is easier to check the version of the production control program and various data, and whether the stored data is incorrect by reading the checksum corresponding to the version It can be easily confirmed whether or not.

  Note that the storage data used for the checksum calculation, the number of times the checksum is displayed, and the like may be arbitrarily changed according to the setting of the memory inspection for the ROM 90121, the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the like. Good. As an example, in the memory test setting table shown in FIG. 61B, the checksum calculation corresponding to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA10 set when the display count is “2” is not executed. By setting, the calculation result may be displayed for a smaller checksum. Alternatively, by adding the setting of the calculation start address and the calculation end address corresponding to the display count “6” or more, the calculation results may be displayed for more checksums.

  The memory inspection process shown in FIG. 61A is executed in step S9055 when it is determined in step S9054 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58 that there is no connection with the main board 9011. If it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 61A that the relay unconnected flag is on, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. Therefore, when both the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the update display in step S90206 is possible, and the determination of the program or data based on the checksum calculation result is possible. The result can be displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9054 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58 that there is a connection with the main board 9011, the memory inspection process in step S9055 is not executed. Even when the memory check process is executed in step S9055, if it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 61A that the relay unconnected flag is off, an update display in step S90206 is performed. I will not. As a result, if only one of the production control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 is not connected to the production control board 9012, the determination result of the program or data based on the checksum calculation result is not displayed. To control.

  Instead of the update display of the calculation content in step S90206, or together with the update display of the calculation content, arbitrary notification based on the checksum calculation result may be performed. For example, instead of or together with the image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, or together with this image display, the image display on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU, the audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, the top frame LED 909a and the left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c or top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, lighting of a notification lamp provided separately from right frame LED 909c, notification operation using other stage devices, a combination of some or all of these, etc. The notification which can specify the determination result of the determination process which determines whether the production data memorize | stored in ROM90121 or production data memory 90123A-90123C is normal may be performed. Furthermore, the signal output from the specific terminal provided on the effect control board 9012 may be set to different output states depending on the checksum calculation result. Thus, the determination result as to whether or not the production data is normal may be any information that can be notified by controlling an arbitrary output.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S9065 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 63, the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 determines whether or not it is the BGM change timing (step S90151). For example, CPU 90130 may determine that it is the BGM change timing when a predetermined BGM change condition is satisfied based on an effect control command transmitted from main board 9011 or the like. As an example, the BGM change condition only needs to be set so as to be satisfied when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed to any of a normal state, a probability change state, and a short-time state.

  If it is determined in step S90151 that it is the BGM change timing (step S90151; Yes), the start address and end address of the audio data corresponding to the music to be played back as BGM are specified (step S90152). For example, the predetermined area of the ROM 90121 includes data that can specify the start address and the end address in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memory 90123A for the audio data corresponding to the music reproduced as BGM for each gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The BGM setting table may be stored in advance. The CPU 90130 may specify the start address and end address of the audio data by referring to the BGM setting table according to the gaming state specified based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S90152, loop reproduction start control for starting loop reproduction in which the music to be BGM is repeatedly reproduced is performed (step S90153). For example, the CPU 90130 notifies the sound processing circuit 90143 of a command indicating a loop reproduction instruction together with the start address and end address of the sound data specified in step S90152. The audio processing circuit 90143 may access the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A and read the audio data from the start address and end address sections indicated in the command from the CPU 90130. Then, in accordance with the designation to perform loop playback, the music corresponding to the audio data is sequentially played back from the beginning, and when the end of the music is played back, the playback of the music may be repeated by returning to the beginning.

  With the loop reproduction start control in step S90153, for example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, the music as the normal BGM can be repeatedly reproduced. Further, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the probability variation state, the music as the probability variation BGM can be repeatedly reproduced. When the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the short-time state, the music as the short-time BGM can be repeatedly reproduced.

  When it is determined in step S90151 that it is not the BGM change timing (step S90151; No), after executing the loop reproduction start control in step S90153, processing according to the value of the effect process flag is executed. At this time, the CPU 90130 determines the value of the effect process flag stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, and performs a process according to the determination value from a plurality of processes described in advance in the effect control program. Select and execute. The processing executed according to the determination value of the effect process flag includes the processing of steps S90170 to S90176.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received, and the variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The process etc. which determine whether to start are included. The first variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started. The second variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is started. When either the first change start command or the second change start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the screen of the main image display device 905MA corresponding to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. In order to perform variable display of decorative symbols on the above and other various presentation operations, it includes processing to determine fixed decorative symbols and various presentation control patterns according to the variation pattern of special symbols and the type of display result, etc. Yes. When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the CPU 90130 performs various controls from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the effect control timer setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122. Processing for reading out data and performing various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols is included. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, in response to the reception of the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 9011, etc., the finalized symbol as the final stop symbol that becomes the variable display result of the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed. Processing to display (derived display) is included. Note that, in response to the end code being read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the finalized decorative symbol may be displayed in a complete stop (derived display). In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, the production control board 9012 side autonomously does not depend on the production control command from the main board 9011. The fixed display pattern can be derived and displayed on the screen to determine the variable display result. After performing such effect control, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The variable display stop process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The variable display stop process starts the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command or the determination result of whether or not the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. The process which determines whether it is performed is included. When the variable display result corresponds to “big hit” and the big hit gaming state is started, the value of the production process flag is updated to “4”, while the variable display result corresponds to “lost”. If the big hit gaming state is not started, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

  The jackpot display process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot display process includes a process for executing a jackpot notification effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the jackpot gaming state based on the reception of the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like. Yes. When the execution of the big hit notification effect ends, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this big hit effect processing, for example, the CPU 90130 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit effect executed in the big hit game state, and displays the effect image based on the set contents in the main image display device. Displaying on the screen of 905MA or the sub-image display device 905SU, executing display effects by the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, and outputting sound effect signals to the sound output board 9013, the sound and effects from the speakers 908L and 908R. Sound output, lighting frame output 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, and decoration LED are turned on / off or blinking by output of illumination signals to the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, and other effect control is executed. And a jackpot game To enable execution of the production in the big hit that corresponds to. In the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a big hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 9011, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit end effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot end effect process, the CPU 90130 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot end effect (ending effect) executed when the jackpot game state ends, and an effect image based on the set content Display, output of fruit sounds, turning on / off or blinking of various light emitting members, and other effect operations are performed to enable execution of a jackpot end effect corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. Thereafter, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S90171 of FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 64, the CPU 90130 first determines a final stop symbol or the like that becomes a final symbol as a variable symbol display result (step S90401). In step S90401, the CPU 90130 performs final processing based on the variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. Determine the stop symbol. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and variable display result include “non-reach (loss)”, “reach (lack)”, “non-probability change (big hit)”, and “probability change (big hit)”. is there.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is “lost”. " When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result becomes “losing”. . When the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the short-time state. When the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big win”, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is changed to the probable state.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the CPU 90130 determines different (unmatched) decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R as the final stop symbols. . The CPU 90130 is updated by a random number circuit built in (or externally attached to) the effect control microcomputer 90120 or an effect random counter provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control counter setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122. Among the effect random numbers, numerical data indicating random values for determining the left determined symbol is extracted, and by referring to the left determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121, the “left ”Is determined in the decorative symbol display area 5L. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol is extracted from the random numbers for presentation, and by referring to a right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121, etc. Of these, the right determined decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol is extracted from the random numbers for production, and by referring to the medium fixed symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121, the fixed decorative symbol is displayed. Among them, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is determined.

  When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, the CPU 131 determines the same (matching) decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R as the final stop symbols. . The CPU 90130 extracts numerical data indicating random values for determining the left and right determined symbols from the random numbers for rendering, and by referring to the left and right determined symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121 and the like, Among them, the decorative symbols with the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined. Furthermore, numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the medium fixed symbol among the random numbers for production is extracted, and by referring to the medium fixed symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 90121, among the fixed decorative symbols, etc. The medium fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, the CPU 90130 is the same in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The (coincident) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. CPU90130 extracts the numerical data which shows the random number value for jackpot fixed symbol determination among the random numbers for production. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot fixed symbol determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 90121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are aligned and stopped. The decorative symbol having the same symbol number is determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, etc. It is only necessary to determine which one of the decorative design (depicted decorative design) and the probability variation design (for example, the decorative design indicating an odd number) is the final decorative design. In the jackpot promotion promotion, a combination of decorative symbols (non-probable big hit combination) that recalls a big hit but does not recall a probable change state is once stopped and displayed in a promising state during the big hit gaming state or at the end of the big hit gaming state. This is an effect to notify whether or not.

  As a specific example, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, a symbol to be a definite decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when the variable display content is “probability change (big hit)” and it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative design is determined from a plurality of types of probability change designs. On the other hand, when the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Accordingly, it is only necessary to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed despite the fact that the probability variation symbols are all derived and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols, so that the player is not distrusted.

  In the process of step S90401, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probable change (big hit)”, it is determined whether or not to execute a probable change promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a jackpot promotion effect. May be. In the redraw lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable big hit combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult to recognize or impossible to recognize that it is controlled to the probabilistic state, It is possible to notify that the control is changed to the probability variation state by variably displaying (revariing) the decoration symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probability variation big hit combination comprising the same probability variation symbol. Note that there is a case in which the control of the probability variation state is not notified when the decoration symbol of the non-probable variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed after the decoration symbol is re-variable in the re-lottery effect. If it is determined that the re-lottery effect is to be executed in the process of step S90401, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed may be determined.

  Following the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in step S90401, a notice effect is determined (step S90402). In step S90402, for example, the presence / absence of the notice effect or the effect mode when the notice effect is executed may be determined using a notice effect determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121, for example. In the notice effect determination table, for example, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random number for determining the notice effect may be assigned to the presence / absence of the notice effect or the determination result of the effect mode according to the variable display content. . The CPU 90130 may determine the presence / absence of the notice effect and the effect mode by referring to the notice effect determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the notice effect among the random numbers for effect.

  Following the determination of the notice effect in step S90402, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S90403). For example, the CPU 90130 selects any one of a plurality of special figure variation effect control patterns prepared in correspondence with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as a usage pattern. In addition, CPU 90130 selects any one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns corresponding to the determination result of the notice effect produced by the process of step S90402, and sets it as a use pattern.

  After determining the effect control pattern in step S90403, the CPU 90130 is provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122 corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, for example. The initial value of the effect control process timer is set (step S90404). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the main image display device 905MA is performed (step S90405). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S90404 is transmitted to the VDP 90140, etc., and provided on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The variation of the decorative pattern may be started in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R.

  Following the process of step S90405, in response to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, settings for updating the on-hold storage display in the start winning storage display area 905H are performed (step S90406). For example, the display part corresponding to the hold number “1” in the start winning memory display area 905H may be deleted and the entire display part may be moved to the left one by one. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S90407), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

  FIG. 65A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 65A, the effect control pattern includes, for example, an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, light emitter control data, movable member control data, operation detection control data, an end code, and the like. It is composed of process data including The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with an effect control process timer value that is a stored value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122. ) And a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 9011, or a predetermined process is performed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120. Data indicating the timing of switching the presentation control may be set corresponding to predetermined control contents and processing contents such as being executed. Pattern data constituting such an effect control pattern may be stored in advance in the ROM 90121 as management data.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the display screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. It is. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU. Even if display data used to create lighting data for controlling lighting modes by a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is added to the display data of the effect image on the display screen of the sub image display device 905SU. Good. In this case, if the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the sub-image display device 905SU is designated by the display control data, the lighting mode by the plurality of light emitters arranged in a line to constitute the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 Can also be specified. It is not limited to what designates the lighting mode in the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 by the display control data, and the lighting mode in the plurality of light emitters is controlled using control data different from the display control data. May be specified.

  The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 908L and 908R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects or the like in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R. For example, the audio control data only needs to indicate various settings such as whether or not to perform loop playback in addition to the start address and end address of the audio data corresponding to the music in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A. .

  The light emitter control data includes, for example, data indicating lighting operation modes in various light emitting members such as a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the decoration LED. include. That is, the light emitter control data is data that specifies lighting operations of various light emitting members. The movable member control data includes data indicating the operation mode of the movable members 9051 to 9054, such as data indicating the drive mode of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for rotating and moving the movable members 9051 to 9054, for example. ing. In other words, the movable member control data is data for designating the rotation operation and the movement operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054. The operation detection control data includes, for example, an operation effective period for effectively detecting an instruction operation (tilting operation) for the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A and an instruction operation (push-pull operation) for the trigger button, or an instruction operation for the push button 9031B ( Data indicating an effect operation mode according to the player's operation action, such as an operation effective period for effectively detecting (pressing operation) and data for specifying the control content of the effect operation when each operation is detected effectively. include.

  Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plural types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different according to the contents of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, if there is process data that includes all of display control data, sound control data, light emitter control data, movable member control data, and operation detection control data, process data that includes a part of these process data There may be. Furthermore, other various control data such as, for example, production model control data indicating an operation mode in the movable member included in the production model may be included.

  FIG. 65 (B) shows various effect operations executed according to the contents of the effect control pattern. The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screens of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. Moreover, you may perform control which performs the display production | presentation by turning on the some light-emitting body arranged in the light-emitting body unit 9071-9074 in the aspect designated with display control data. Furthermore, while performing control to output sound from the speakers 908L and 908R in a mode specified by the audio control data, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in a mode specified by the light emitter control data, Various light emitting members such as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are controlled to blink, and the trigger button, operation rod, or push button 9031B of the stick controller 9031A is controlled during the operation effective period specified by the operation detection control data. Control to accept the operation and determine the contents of the production. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting variable display of decorative symbols. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122. The storage address of the pattern data constituting the pattern in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 90121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the CPU 90130 performs the effect devices (main image display device 905MA, sub-image display device 905SU, light emitter unit 9071) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. To 9074, speakers 908L and 908R, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, various light emitting members including the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, the movable members 9051 to 9054, the decorative member 9057, etc. ) Control proceeds. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, light emitter control data # 1 to light emitter control data #n, movable member control data # 1 to movable member control data #n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n Production control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n indicating the content of control of the production operation and designating execution of production control are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 to the VDP 90140, the audio processing circuit 90143, the general-purpose output controller 90145, and the like. The VDP 90140 that has received a command from the CPU 90130 reads the image data (image element data) indicated by the command from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B and temporarily stores them in the work area of the VRAM 90141. The VDP 90140 selects image data corresponding to the display screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU from the image data stored in the work area of the VRAM 90141, and converts the selected image data into pixel data. For example, it is arranged at a predetermined position in the image drawing area of the VRAM 90141 (a position indicated by information indicating a display position in a display area such as the main image display device 905MA). As a result, display data for one screen is created in the image drawing area of the VRAM 90141. At this time, display data used to create lighting data of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be added to the display data of the effect image on the display screen of the sub-image display device 905SU. In addition, the voice processing circuit 90143 that has received a command from the CPU 90130 develops the voice data indicated by the command by temporarily storing it in a voice RAM or the like.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect process executed in step S90172 of FIG. In the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 66, the CPU 90130 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, an effect control process timer value (step S90451). As an example, in step S90451, the presentation control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 subtraction), and variable display is performed when an end code is read from the presentation control pattern corresponding to the updated presentation control process timer value. What is necessary is just to determine with time having passed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S90451 (step S90451; No), it is determined whether or not it is the super reach production start timing (step S90452). The super reach production start timing is a timing at which execution of the reach production in the super reach is started, and may be determined in advance in the production control pattern determined in the process of step S90403 shown in FIG. 64, for example. If it is the super reach production start timing (step S90452; Yes), BGM off setting is performed (step S90453). For example, the CPU 90130 sets the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the BGM to OFF according to a command to the audio processing circuit 90143. In the audio processing circuit 90143, for example, the volume of the BGM may be changed to turn off the output. In the period in which the BGM is off, the music corresponding to the BGM may be continuously played back by merely setting the BGM volume to off. Alternatively, during the period when the BGM is off, the reproduction of the music corresponding to the BGM may be paused. After performing the BGM off setting in step S90453, the music on setting for super reach production is performed (step S90454). For example, the CPU 90130 notifies the start address and the end address of the audio data corresponding to the music for super reach production by a command to the audio processing circuit 90143. The audio processing circuit 90143 acquires audio data corresponding to the music for super reach production based on the start address and end address of the audio data notified by the instruction from the CPU 90130. Then, while setting the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the music for super reach production to ON, the music corresponding to the audio data may be reproduced sequentially from the top.

  If it is not the super reach production start timing in step S90452 (step S90452; No), or after performing the music on setting in step S90454, it is determined whether it is the super reach production end timing (step S90455). The super reach production end timing is a timing for ending the execution of the reach production in the super reach, and may be determined in advance in the production control pattern determined in the process of step S90403 shown in FIG. 64, for example. When it is the super reach production end timing (step S90455; Yes), the music off setting for the super reach production is performed (step S90456). For example, the CPU 90130 sets the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the music for super reach production to OFF in accordance with a command to the audio processing circuit 90143. In the audio processing circuit 90143, for example, the volume of the music for super reach production may be set off and the reproduction of the music or the like may be terminated. After performing the music off setting for the super reach production in step S90456, the BGM on setting is performed (step S90457). For example, the CPU 90130 sets the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the BGM to ON according to a command to the audio processing circuit 90143. In the audio processing circuit 90143, for example, the BGM volume may be changed and the output may be turned on.

  If it is not the super reach production end timing in step S90455 (step S90455; No), or after performing the BGM on setting in step S90457, for example, based on the settings in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, etc. Then, after performing other effect operation control including the variable display operation of the decorative design (step S90458), the variable display effect processing is ended.

  If the variable display time has elapsed in step S90451 (step S90451; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received (step S90459). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (step S90459; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and awaits. If the predetermined time has passed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may make it do.

  If a symbol determination command is received in step S90459 (step S90459; Yes), for example, a final stop that is a display result in variable display of decorative symbols such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP 90140, for example. A control for deriving and displaying a symbol (definite decorative symbol) is performed (step S90460). In addition, a predetermined time is set as a waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step S90461). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display stop process (step S90462), and the variable display effect process is terminated.

  In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 66, after the music-off setting for the super reach effect is performed in step S90456, the BGM-on setting is immediately performed in step S90457. On the other hand, the BGM on setting may be performed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the music off setting is performed in step S90456. For example, the BGM on setting may be performed after the control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol in step S90460. Alternatively, the BGM on setting may be performed when the variable display start waiting process in step S90170 shown in FIG. 63 is executed. In particular, when the variable display result is “big hit”, following the music off setting for super reach production, the fanfare production music that notifies that the variable display result is “big hit” is played, Then, in response to the gaming state becoming the big hit gaming state, the music for the big hit directing may be reproduced. Note that the music for the super reach production may be directly played as the music for the big hit production as it is. In this way, when the variable display result is “big hit”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, if the BGM on setting is performed corresponding to the execution of the variable display start waiting process of step S90170 shown in FIG. Good. Thereby, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is possible to smoothly start the reproduction of the music to be BGM.

  In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 66, based on the effect control process timer value from the effect control pattern (for example, the special figure changing effect control pattern, the notice effect control pattern, etc.) determined in the process of step S90403 shown in FIG. Using the process data acquired in this way, control for executing the rendering operation by various rendering devices is performed. Also in the big hit effect process in step S90175 and the big hit end effect process in step S90176 shown in FIG. 63, the CPU 90130 reads out the effect control pattern from the ROM 90121 or the like, and uses the process data acquired based on the effect control process timer value. What is necessary is just to make it control for performing presentation operation | movement by various production | presentation apparatuses.

  In order to perform such effect control, the CPU 90130 determines whether or not the effect control process timer has timed out, and switches the effect control execution data in the process data when time-out occurs. That is, in the process data # 1 to process data #n as shown in FIG. 65A, the display control of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU is performed based on the display control data set next. The lighting control of a plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be performed. Also, in the process data # 1 to process data #n, audio output control of the speakers 908L and 908R is performed based on the audio control data set next. Further, in the process data # 1 to process data #n, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 based on the light emitter control data set next, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right Lighting control of the frame LED 909c and the decoration LED is performed. In process data # 1 to process data #n, drive control of operation motors 9060A to 9060C is performed based on the movable member control data set next. In addition, in process data # 1 to process data #n, the detection control of the instruction operation by the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B is performed based on the operation detection control data set next.

  In the effect control microcomputer 90120, the VDP 90140 reads various image data such as character image data necessary for displaying the effect image from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B based on a display control command from the CPU 90130, and a predetermined area of the VRAM 90141. To place. When the effect image is displayed, the same character image may be repeatedly displayed many times. When the image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B is compressed, it takes time to decompress the image data after reading it. Therefore, by placing necessary character image data in the storage area of the VRAM 90141 at the stage of starting the display of the effect image, it is compared with reading out from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B corresponding to each frame. The time required for drawing can be shortened.

  CPU 90130 sets an attribute in the attribute register of VDP 90140 each time V blank occurs after display of the effect image is started, and then instructs execution of reading of the attribute. In response to this, the VDP 90140 reads the attribute. When this reading is completed, a reading end interrupt signal is output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130. When the CPU 90130 receives the reading end interrupt signal, the CPU 90130 instructs the execution of the drawing process. Thus, the VDP 90140 executes a drawing process by writing display data to the VRAM 90141 according to the read attribute.

  In the VRAM 90141, a main frame buffer and a sub frame buffer are assigned to each of a plurality of storage areas to which an image display area and an image drawing area are assigned. The main frame buffer stores display data for displaying an image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. For example, a memory area capable of storing pixel data of 800 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 600 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction) is allocated to the main frame buffer. The subframe buffer stores display data for displaying an image on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU, and also stores display data used to create lighting data for controlling lighting of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. May be. For example, a memory area capable of storing pixel data of 480 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 885 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction) is allocated to the subframe buffer.

  Image data used to create lighting data for controlling lighting of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 corresponds to an image size of 320 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 320 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction), for example. Yes. The VDP 90140 reduces the image data for lighting data creation to an image size of 80 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 80 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction). The reduced image size corresponds to the resolution of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in which a plurality of light emitters are aligned. Thus, the image data for lighting data creation has a resolution higher than that of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. As an example, anti-aliasing processing such as supersampling is performed. As another example, the RGB value corresponding to the upper left dot is obtained and displayed as the display data for each rectangular range of 4 dots × 4 dots in the vertical and horizontal directions in the image data, so that the vertical and horizontal directions are each 1/4. Display data reduced in size may be created. In this way, display data to be converted into lighting data is created using image data having a resolution higher than the display resolution of the plurality of light emitters. Thereby, for example, jaggy generated in the contour of a character image or the like can be suppressed, and the smoothness of display in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 can be enhanced. In particular, when an effect image such as a character image is moved and displayed, the contour portion can be displayed smoothly, and the interest of the display effect in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 can be improved. Note that the image size reduction may be performed in the image data transformation process or display data rendering process by the VDP 90140, or may be performed using a predetermined scaler circuit. The scaler circuit only needs to be able to reduce the image size at a predetermined reduction ratio (for example, 1/4) by converting the number of pixels of the display data read from the VRAM 90141. As described above, the size change of the display data may be realized by a hardware circuit, or may be realized by executing a predetermined program as software.

  The image data read by the VDP 90140 may be used to create lighting data by being written in a predetermined area (light emitter lighting data area) in the subframe buffer. On the other hand, the image data read out by the VDP 90140 is used for image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA by being written in the main frame buffer. Further, the image data read out by the VDP 90140 is used for image display on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU by being written in an area other than the light emitter lighting data area in the subframe buffer. In this way, even for the same image data, it is only necessary to be able to use differently depending on the writing position in the VRAM 90141. Thus, the image data read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B and temporarily stored in the VRAM 90141 is for image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU or the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. As long as it can also be used for creating lighting data for controlling lighting. Accordingly, the image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B includes at least the effect image display control in the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU and the lighting control of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. It can be used for either control.

  For example, one frame of display data stored in the subframe buffer is output in 1/60 second (about 16.7 milliseconds). As a result, the sub-image display device 905SU can update the display image at a frame period of 1/60 seconds. If the data for controlling the illuminant is also added to the data for displaying the sub-image, it can be output at a period of 1/60 seconds. In the light emitter control board 9016C, the display data transmitted from the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A is temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151. Therefore, the buffer memory 90151 may store data for controlling the light emitter at a 1/60 second period in which the VDP 90140 outputs display data for one frame.

  In the light emitter control board 9016C, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 has a shorter cycle than a frame cycle (such as 1/60 second) of an image display device using an LCD (liquid crystal display device) such as the sub image display device 905SU. Lighting data for lighting control of a plurality of light emitters may be generated. As a specific example, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data for controlling lighting of the light emitter at a period of 1/120 second (about 8.3 milliseconds). As described above, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data of the light emitter in a cycle (1/120 seconds) shorter than the output cycle (1/60 seconds) of the display data by the VDP 90140, and the serial output circuit 90153 A control signal based on the lighting data is output. In this case, the buffer memory 90151 can store the light emission control data included in the display data corresponding to the image display for one frame output from the VDP 90140, that is, the light emitter control data of 80 dots × 80 dots. It only needs to have a storage data capacity. Further, by turning on the light emitters in a relatively short cycle, flicker (flickering) in a display effect executed by a plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 can be suppressed and displayed. The interest of the production can be improved. The lighting control of the illuminant is not limited to the one that is performed at a period that is ½ of the output period of the display data. What is necessary is just to be performed with an arbitrary cycle shorter than that.

  The serial output circuit 90153 has the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 in a cycle longer than the time required for the light emission control data included in the display data corresponding to the image display for one frame to be written in the buffer memory 90151. It may be set to output a control signal corresponding to the data. In this manner, the light emission control data corresponding to one frame is temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 in a time shorter than the cycle in which the control signal corresponding to the lighting data is output. As a result, even when the buffer memory 90151 having a storage data capacity capable of temporarily storing light emission control data corresponding to one frame is used, the lighting data can be stored in a time shorter than the output period of the control signal corresponding to the lighting data. Generation can be completed.

  Note that the buffer memory 90151 has a storage data capacity capable of storing light emission control data included in display data corresponding to image display for a plurality of frames, such as display data corresponding to image display for two frames. It may be. In this case, a plurality of buffer areas are allocated to the storage area of the buffer memory 90151. Each buffer area only needs to have a storage data capacity capable of storing light emission control data included in display data corresponding to image display for one frame.

  The lighting data generation circuit 90152 divides the data into a plurality of data ranges according to the storage position (reading address or the like) of the buffer memory 90151 storing the light emission control data. For example, the storage area of the buffer memory 90151 is divided into a plurality of buffer memory areas according to the storage address. Based on which data stored in which buffer memory area is read out, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 converts the lighting data of the light emitters included in which light emitter block among the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. Specify whether to convert.

  The display data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 is assigned to any one of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 for each data range divided into a plurality. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 can specify the data range assigned to each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 by referring to an address specification table serving as conversion setting information prepared in advance. Based on this identification result, address information of the light emitter driver provided corresponding to each light emitter block B01 to B42 can be designated. The address specifying table may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of a ROM built in (or attached to) the lighting data generation circuit 90152. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including address information and causes the serial output circuit 90153 to output the lighting data to the light emitter driving unit 90154.

  In addition, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes gradation data indicating the gradation control amount of each light emitting element constituting each of the plurality of light emitters. For example, the gradation data only needs to indicate the output period (pulse width) of the pulse signal in PWM control as the gradation control amount. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 refers to a lighting data generation table serving as color conversion setting information prepared in advance based on the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data read from the buffer memory 90151. Thus, gradation data indicating the gradation control amount is generated. The lighting data generation table may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of a ROM built in (or externally attached to) the lighting data generation circuit 90152.

  The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 corresponds to the number of gradations smaller than the number of gradations of the image displayed based on the display data used for the conversion. For example, the display data that is transmitted from the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A and temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 is for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). Gradation control is made possible in 256 stages so that the luminance (gradation) is at any level from “0” to “255”. Thus, the number of gradations of the image displayed based on the display data transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is “256”. The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 has a luminance (gradation) of any one of “0” to “63” for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). Gradation control is made possible in 64 stages so that the level becomes. Thus, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 indicates the number of gradations of “64” which is smaller than “256”.

  The correspondence relationship between the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated in the display data and the gradation control amount of each light emitting element indicated by the gradation data included in the lighting data of the light emitter is the light emission corresponding to each emission color. It may be determined in advance in consideration of element characteristics (for example, light emission efficiency) and white balance. As an example, a light-emitting diode serving as a light-emitting element constituting each light-emitting body has nonlinear characteristics in which the amount of current increases rapidly when the applied voltage reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, if converted to a gradation control amount proportional to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data, there is a risk that display inconveniences caused by a plurality of light emitters such as overexposure and blackout may occur. is there. Therefore, the lighting data is converted from the display data so that the light emitting elements corresponding to the respective light emission colors constituting each of the plurality of light emitters have a light emission amount equivalent to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data. The setting information for converting to may be stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

  FIG. 67 shows a configuration example of the lighting data generation table TC1 referred to by the lighting data generation circuit 90152. In the lighting data generation table TC1, the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the lighting data is set corresponding to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data. Here, for each of the display colors R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicated by the display data, the luminance (gradation) is any level from “0” to “10”. In this case, the table data may be configured so that the luminance (gradation) of each display color indicated by the lighting data is at a level of “0”. That is, for each light emitting element of each display color included in one light emitter corresponding to one dot, when the brightness (gradation) shown in the display data is “10” or less, the brightness of each display color By generating lighting data in which (gradation) is “0”, a restriction is provided so that the light emitter is not lit.

  On the other hand, the lighting data generation table TC1 has at least one luminance (gradation) of “11” or more for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicated by the display data. In this case, the table data may be configured so that lighting data indicating RGB values proportional to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data is generated. For example, when the brightness (gradation) of B (blue) indicated by the display data is “11”, the brightness (gradation) of B (blue) indicated by the lighting data is “2”. If the luminance of R (red) or G (green) indicated by the display data is “0” to “3”, lighting data indicating luminance (gradation) “0” is generated, and “4” is generated. If “7”, lighting data indicating luminance (gradation) “1” is generated, and if “8”-“11”, lighting data indicating luminance (gradation) “2” is generated. Thus, the table data of the lighting data generation table TC1 is configured.

  The image data read by the VDP 90140 from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B by the effect control microcomputer 90120 is used for image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are turned on. It may also be used for creating lighting data to be controlled. At this time, when the luminance (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data created from the image data used for image display is less than a predetermined amount, the same proportional relationship as when the luminance is greater than the predetermined amount If the lighting data is generated below, the influence of the non-linear characteristic in the light emitting diode becomes significant, and an unnatural display effect may be performed. Therefore, according to the brightness (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data, when the light emission amount of the light emitter is less than a predetermined amount, the lighting control is limited so that the light emitter is not turned on. Thus, the lighting control is made different between the light emitters whose light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount and the light emitters whose amount is the predetermined amount or more among the plurality of light emitters. In particular, in this embodiment, a light emitter whose light emission amount is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount is provided with a restriction so as not to perform lighting control of the light emitter whose light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount according to the RGB value of the display data. The lighting control is performed according to the RGB value of the lighting data that is proportional to the RGB value of the display data. In this way, by varying the lighting control depending on whether or not the light emission amount is less than a predetermined amount, the influence due to the non-linear characteristics of the light emitting element is reduced, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the display effect. Thus, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the production.

  A plurality of types of lighting data generation tables may be prepared in advance, and any one of the lighting data generation tables may be selected as a usage table based on a predetermined selection setting. In this case, a different lighting data generation table may be selected for each light emission color of the light emitting element included in each light emitter. For example, in the case of the light emitter blocks B01 to B06, the lighting data generation table TR01 is selected according to the emission color R (red), and the lighting data generation table TG01 is selected according to the emission color G (green). The lighting data generation table TB01 is selected according to the color B (blue). On the other hand, in the case of the light emitter blocks B07, B08, and B15, the lighting data generation table TR02 is selected according to the emission color R (red), and the lighting data generation table according to the emission color G (green). TG02 is selected, and the lighting data generation table TB02 is selected according to the emission color B (blue). In the case of the light emitter blocks B09 to B14, the lighting data generation table TR03 is selected according to the emission color R (red), and the lighting data generation table TG03 is selected according to the emission color G (green). The lighting data generation table TB03 is selected according to the emission color B (blue). Each lighting data generation table indicates the gradation control amount of each light emitting element indicating the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data created by the VDP 141 by the gradation data included in the lighting data of the light emitter. It is only necessary to include table data to be converted into The lighting data generation circuit 90152 is designated by the lighting data by referring to the selected lighting data generation table based on the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated in the display data read from the buffer memory 90151. The gradation control amount is determined.

  The characteristics of the light emitting element may differ depending on the emission color. Therefore, the display data is converted so that the correspondence with the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data is converted into a gradation control amount depending on the emission color of each light emitting element constituting the light emitter. Setting information for converting from to lighting data may be stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

  It is only necessary that the display data can be converted into lighting data by using different lighting data generation tables according to the arrangement of the plurality of light emitters corresponding to each light emitter block. Each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 emits light at the same gradation according to the arrangement of the plurality of light emitters depending on the size of the region in which the plurality of light emitters are arranged and arranged, the front-rear relationship of each light emitter unit, and the like. In some cases, the player may have a different impression. Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of each of the plurality of light emitters corresponding to each light emitter block, the lighting data is converted from the display data so that the light emission amount can give an impression as uniform as possible corresponding to the same display color. Setting information for conversion to is stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

  Thus, not only the display color levels (RGB values) indicated by the display data, but also the respective light emitters according to the light emission characteristics of each of the plurality of light emitting elements constituting the light emitter, the arrangement of the plurality of light emitters, and the like. Gradation data indicating a gradation control amount corresponding to is generated. Accordingly, even when light emitters including a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different emission colors are arranged in a predetermined region of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the color reproducibility is enhanced and the effect of the production is enhanced. To improve.

  Note that not all lighting data is generated by referring to the lighting data generation table, and at least a part of the lighting data is generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 executing a predetermined data processing program. May be. For example, for each of the R (red), G (green), and B (blue) display colors indicated in the display data, it is determined whether or not the light emission amount is less than a predetermined amount, and any light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount. In such a case, a process of generating lighting data with luminance (gradation) of “0” may be executed so that the light emitter is not turned on.

  As an example, in the lighting data generation process executed by the lighting data generation circuit 90152, display data for one dot is acquired, and it is determined whether all the RGB values indicated by the display data are “10” or less. . If all the values are “10” or less, the RGB values in the lighting data are all set to “0”. On the other hand, if at least one of the RGB values indicated by the display data is not “10” or less, the lighting data generation table corresponding to the light emitter block and the light emission color is selected. Subsequently, lighting data corresponding to the display data is generated using the selected lighting data generation table. Then, it is determined whether or not the generation of lighting data corresponding to all dots has been completed. If the generation of lighting data has not yet been completed, display data corresponding to the next one dot is acquired, and the same processing is performed. You only need to repeat it. On the other hand, when the generation of lighting data corresponding to all dots is completed, the lighting data generation process may be terminated.

  The lighting data generation process is not limited to the generation of lighting data by referring to the lighting data generation table, and the lighting data may be generated by executing a predetermined arithmetic processing program. For example, in display data that enables gradation control in 256 steps for each display color, the luminance (gradation) of each display color is represented by 8 bits when binary display is used. On the other hand, in the lighting data that enables gradation control in 64 steps for each display color, the brightness (gradation) of each display color is represented by 6 bits when binary display is used. Therefore, when at least one of the RGB values indicated in the display data is not “10” or less, numerical processing is performed to round down the lower 2 bits of the 8-bit data indicating the luminance (gradation) of each display color in the display data. By performing the above, lighting data may be generated. Alternatively, lighting data corresponding to the display data may be generated according to a preset arithmetic expression. A plurality of types of arithmetic processing programs that can be used for conversion from display data to lighting data are prepared in advance, and the lighting data generation circuit 90152 is selected according to the display color or arrangement (light emitter block, etc.) of the light emitting elements. Display data may be converted into lighting data by selecting and executing the arithmetic processing program.

  The display data is acquired for each dot and is not limited to the setting and generation of lighting data. For example, the setting and generation of lighting data may be performed collectively by using predetermined mask data. In this case, with respect to one frame of display data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151, dots having all RGB values of “10” or less are detected, and RGB in the lighting data corresponding to the detected dots is detected. Mask data for setting all values to “0” may be prepared in advance.

  In addition, when all the RGB values indicated by the display data for one dot are “10” or less, the present invention is not limited to the one that sets all the RGB values in the lighting data to “0”. If any of the RGB values indicated by the display data is “10” or less, only the lighting data corresponding to the display color may be set to “0”. As an example, the luminance (gradation) of R (red) indicated by the display data is “100”, the luminance (gradation) of G (green) is “8”, and the luminance (gradation) of B (blue) is In the case of “2”, the luminance (gradation) of R (red) indicated by the lighting data is “25”, while the luminance (gradation) of G (green) and B (blue) is “ The table data of the lighting data generation table may be configured to be “0”, or the lighting data generation circuit 90152 may execute a predetermined arithmetic processing program. In this manner, for each light emitting element of each display color in the light emitter, a restriction may be provided so as not to perform lighting control of the light emitter that causes the light emission amount to be less than a predetermined amount according to the RGB value of the display data. However, if there is a display color with an RGB value of “10” or less among the display data for one dot, the color of the emission color is set when the RGB value in the lighting data for only that display color is set to “0”. May change. Therefore, when the RGB values indicated by the display data for one dot are all “10” or less, it is desirable that the RGB values in the lighting data are all set to “0”.

  Alternatively, when the RGB values indicated by the display data for one dot are added and the total value is less than a predetermined value, the RGB values in the lighting data may all be set to “0”. As an example, when the total value obtained by adding the luminance (gradation) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicated by the display data is “30” or less, the lighting data indicates The table data of the lighting data generation table may be configured such that the brightness (gradation) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is all “0”, or the lighting data generation circuit 90152 may execute a predetermined arithmetic processing program. In this case, even if the luminance (gradation) of R (red) indicated by the display data is “11”, the luminance (gradation) of G (green) and B (blue) is “0”. If so, the luminance (gradation) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicated by the lighting data is all “0”. In this way, by limiting the lighting of the light emitters so that the total (total amount) of the light emission amounts of the plurality of light emitting elements constituting one light emitter is less than a predetermined amount, It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the production without giving a sense of discomfort to the display production.

  In addition, according to the RGB value of the display data, the light emission amount is not limited to the one that does not perform the lighting control of the light emitter that is less than the predetermined amount. For example, the influence due to the non-linear characteristic of the light emitting element is considered. Arbitrary restrictions may be provided. As an example, if the luminance (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data is “0” to “8”, lighting data indicating the luminance (gradation) “0” is generated, and “9” or The table data of the lighting data generation table may be configured so that lighting data having a luminance (gradation) of “1” if “10” is generated, or the lighting data generation circuit 90152 performs a predetermined calculation. A processing program may be executed. As described above, when the luminance (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data is less than a predetermined amount, the lighting control is limited to be performed with a correspondence relationship different from the proportional relationship when the display color is greater than the predetermined amount. May be provided. Further, the threshold value of whether or not the light emission amount of the light emitter is less than the predetermined amount is not limited to the RGB value in the display data being “10”, and considering the influence of the non-linear characteristics of the light emitting element, etc. Any value may be set. Depending on the light emission color (display color) of the light emitting element, the threshold for determining whether or not the light emission amount is less than a predetermined amount may be set differently.

  The image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B is not limited to that used for both display control and lighting control, and dedicated image data is prepared in order to create lighting data. 90123A and 90123B may be stored. In this case, the image data is set in advance so that when the lighting data is generated in a proportional relationship with the display data, the illuminant whose light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount is not lit without lighting control. You may make it do. Lighting data may be created using the light emission data stored in the effect data memory 90123C. Also in this case, the light emission data may be set in advance so that the light emitter whose light emission amount is less than the predetermined amount is not lit without the lighting control.

  The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including gradation data to which address information assigned to the light emitter driver above or below the digit is added, and the serial output circuit 90153 transmits the light data to the light emitter driver 90154. Is output. Further, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes drive control data for performing dynamic lighting control of a plurality of light emitters for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including drive control data to which address information assigned to the strobe-side light emitter driver is added, and causes the serial output circuit 90153 to output to the light emitter drive unit 90154.

  The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a common clock signal to each of the plurality of serial output systems K01 to K21 as the serial clock SC shown in FIG. The serial clock SC output from the serial output circuit 90153 is supplied to each of the plurality of light emitter drivers included in the light emitter driver 90154 via the serial signal wiring. Each light emitter driver receives serial data SD transmitted in synchronization with the serial clock SC.

  On the other hand, the serial output circuit 90153 may output a control signal including drive control data and gradation data at different timings as serial data SD depending on each of the serial output systems K01 to K21. When a control signal is output to each of the serial output systems K01 to K21 at the same timing, lighting control of a large number of light emitters at the same timing is performed by a large number of light emitter drivers included in the light emitter drive unit 90154. May be started. In this case, a large amount of drive current flows as an inrush current in a short period of time, which may cause radio interference due to noise radio waves. In addition, the manufacturing cost may increase as a power supply circuit for generating a large amount of drive current is required. On the other hand, by generating a control signal as serial data SD at different timings according to each of the plurality of serial output systems K01 to K21, generation of inrush current is suppressed, generation of noise radio waves, and production An increase in cost can be prevented.

  In the luminous body drive unit 90154, each luminous body driver checks whether or not the luminous body driver address indicated by the address information included in the received serial data SD matches the luminous body driver address assigned to itself. To do. At this time, if they match, serial data SD as drive control data and gradation data is taken in and converted into parallel data, and lighting control of the light emitter is performed based on this. For example, the strobe-side light emitter driver drives and controls a plurality of light emitters connected to the strobe signal line by outputting a strobe signal based on the drive control data. Further, the light emitter driver on the upper side or the lower side of the digit outputs a digit signal based on the gradation data, thereby controlling the gradation of the plurality of light emitters connected to the digit signal line. Thus, the dynamic lighting control of the plurality of light emitters is performed for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 included in the movable members 9051 to 9054 constituting the effect movable mechanism 9050 are aligned. The display effect by the lighting mode of the several light-emitting body arrange | positioned is performed.

  As an example of a specific display effect by the effect moving mechanism 9050, in the retracted state (first state) in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect moving mechanism 9050 are separated and the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is visible. The display effect using the plurality of light emitters arranged on the movable members 9051 to 9054 that can be visually recognized by the player is executed in conjunction with the display effect by the main image display device 905MA. In the retracted state, the movable members 9051 and 9052 are positioned above and the movable members 9053 and 9054 are positioned below. Thus, when the movable members 9051 to 9054 are in the retracted state where they are not rotating (when stopped), only the light emitters that are visible from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901 among the plurality of light emitters. Control the lighting. Thereby, power consumption can be reduced. As the display effect by the lighting control of the light emitters, for example, characters and symbols are displayed, or blinking and light emission colors of a plurality of light emitters are moved in a predetermined order, so that the display can be adjusted according to the variable display by the main image display device 905MA. A display effect or the like may be executed. Further, when the reach effect is executed, at least one of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be moved (vibrated, advanced, etc.), or a character or symbol such as “reach” can be displayed using a plurality of light emitters. Good.

  On the other hand, in the advanced state (second state) where the upper mechanism and lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are close to each other and the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is difficult to visually recognize or cannot be visually recognized, it is disposed on the movable members 9051 to 9054. The display effect using all the plurality of light emitters is executed in conjunction with the display effect by the main image display device 905MA or independently of the display effect by the main image display device 905MA. In the advanced state, the movable members 9051 and 9052 rotate as the decorative member 9057 moves downward in the upper mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050, and the movable members 9053 and 9054 of the lower mechanism are positioned above. . As described above, when the movable members 9051 to 9054 are in the advanced state in which the movable members 9051 to 9054 are rotating (when operating), all the plurality of light emitters are controlled to be lit.

  The integrated display effect in the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be started before or during the change of the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 from the retracted state to the advanced state. As described above, when the movable members 9051 to 9054 are rotating, the display effect may be executed by turning on all of the plurality of light emitters regardless of whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 901 is visible. Thereby, the effect of the turning operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be increased. In addition, by lighting all of the plurality of light emitters regardless of whether or not they can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the player can visually recognize the light emitters that are not subjected to the lighting control by simple control. Can be suppressed.

  A ROM 90121 and effect data memories 90123A to 90123C mounted on the effect control board 9012 as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 are provided with a plurality of storage areas corresponding to the stored contents. For example, the ROM 90121 includes a program management area R01 serving as a first storage area in which a program for production control and various management data are stored, and a voice data first storage area serving as a second storage area in which voice data is stored. R11 is provided. The effect data memory 90123A is provided with an audio data second storage area R12 as a storage area for storing audio data and an image data first storage area R21 as a storage area for storing image data. The effect data memory 90123B is provided with an image data second storage area R22 as a storage area for storing image data. Audio data used for controlling audio output by the speakers 908R and 908L is stored in the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12. In the first image data storage area R21 and the second image data storage area R22, together with the image data used for controlling the display of the effect image in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, the light emitter units 9071- Image data used for lighting control in a plurality of light emitters aligned in 9074 may be stored.

  FIG. 68A shows a configuration example of audio data stored in the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. . In the example shown in FIG. 68 (A), the start address and end address in the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12 in which the respective audio data are stored correspond to a plurality of music pieces. Is set. For example, the audio data corresponding to the music piece A-1 is used for playing a normal BGM in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, and is stored in a section from the start address MA02 to the end address MA03. Yes. The audio data corresponding to the music piece A-2 is used for reproducing the effect sound at the time of the super reach production in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed, and is stored in the section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05. . The audio data corresponding to the music A-1 and the music A-2 may be stored in the audio data first storage area R11.

  The audio data corresponding to the music piece B-1 in FIG. 68 (A) is used to reproduce the BGM that is in the probability change state in which the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the probability change state, and from the start address MA19 + 1 to the end address MA21. It is stored in the section. Here, the start address MA09 + 1 of the music B-1 has an address value smaller than the address MA10 that is the final address of the ROM 90121, and is included in the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 that provides the first area. Yes. On the other hand, the end address MA1a of the music B-1 is an address value larger than the address MA10 that is the final address of the ROM 90121, and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A that provides the second area. Included. As described above, the audio data corresponding to the music B-1 spans both the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. It is memorized. The audio data corresponding to the music B-2 is used to play back the short-time BGM in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the short-time state, and is stored in the section from the start address MA1a + 1 to the end address MA1c. . The audio data corresponding to the music piece X is used for reproducing the production sound during the big hit where the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the big hit gaming state, and is stored in the section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11. . All of the audio data corresponding to the music B-2 and the music X may be stored in the audio data second storage area R12.

  The audio data corresponding to the music B-1 shown in FIG. 68 (A) includes both the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. In addition, it is stored across. Even in this case, the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12 are provided in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A where consecutive addresses are given, so the music B-1 is reproduced. Sometimes, as in the case of playing other music, the start address and end address of the audio data are designated, the read address is updated sequentially from the start address, and the audio data is read out, so that it corresponds to the music B-1. Audio data to be read can be appropriately read.

  68 (B1) to (B4) are timing charts showing an operation example of playing music in the pachinko gaming machine 901. FIG. Among these, FIG. 68 (B1) shows a period of “execution” in which variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is being executed and “stop” in which they are stopped. FIG. 68 (B2) shows a gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. FIG. FIG. 68 (B3) shows a music to be reproduced among a plurality of music that can be reproduced using the audio data as shown in FIG. 68 (A). FIG. 68 (B4) shows a storage area from which the audio data is read out of the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. Show.

  The variable display shown in FIG. 68 (B1) is executed before the timing T01. At this time, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in FIG. 68 (B2) is a normal state. If the reach effect in the super reach is not executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern in such a normal state, the start address MA02 is set so that the music A-1 as the normal BGM shown in FIG. To the end address MA03, audio data corresponding to the music piece A-1 is read out. A section from the start address MA02 to the end address MA03 is included in the voice data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121. Therefore, until the timing T01, the loop reproduction of the music A-1 to be reproduced is performed as shown in FIG. 68 (B3), and the audio data first storage area R11 is reproduced as shown in FIG. 68 (B4). Is an area for reading audio data.

  Thereafter, at timing T01, reach production in super reach is started. At this time, when it is determined that it is the super reach production start timing in the process of step S90452 shown in FIG. 66, the BGM off setting is performed by the process of step S90453. And the music ON setting for a super reach production is performed by the process of step S90454. Thus, during the period in which the reach effect in the super reach is executed, from the section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05 so that the music A-2 for the super reach effect shown in FIG. 68 (A) is reproduced. The audio data corresponding to the music piece A-2 is read out. A section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05 is included in the voice data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121. Therefore, from the time when the super reach production start timing is reached at timing T01 until the time when the super reach production end timing is reached at timing T02, as shown in FIG. As shown in 68 (B4), the audio data first storage area R11 is an audio data read target area.

  At timing T02, it is determined that it is the super reach production end timing in the process of step S90455 shown in FIG. At this time, the music off setting for the super reach effect is performed by the process of step S90456, and the BGM on setting is performed by the process of step S90457. Thereafter, based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” at timing T03, as shown in FIG. 68 (B2), the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. In the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, for example, a dedicated music for notifying that the variable display result becomes “big hit” may be played during the period from timing T02 to timing T03. . Even when the variable display result is “losing”, a dedicated music corresponding to the execution of the reach effect in the super reach may be played. Alternatively, the music A-2 for super reach production may be continuously played until the timing T03. Or, in order to clearly notify the variable display result, the reproduction of the music may be paused.

  If the jackpot gaming state is reached at timing T03, the sound corresponding to the song X from the section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11 is reproduced so that the song X for the big hit medium effect shown in FIG. 68 (A) is reproduced. Data is read out. The section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11 is included in the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. Therefore, from the time when the jackpot gaming state is reached at timing T03 to the end of the jackpot gaming state at timing T04, the music X is to be reproduced as shown in FIG. 68 (B3), and FIG. 68 (B4). As shown, the audio data second storage area R12 is an audio data read target area.

  At timing T04, the big hit gaming state is ended, and the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the probability changing state. At this time, it is determined in step S90151 shown in FIG. 63 that it is the BGM change timing. Then, by the processing in steps S90152 and S153, the music B-1 is started from the section from the start address MA09 + 1 to the end address MA1a so that the music B-1 as the probability changing BGM shown in FIG. Is read out. The section from the start address MA09 + 1 to the end address MA1a is included in both the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. Therefore, when the music B-1 is played back in a loop in the probability changing state, the audio data read target area becomes the audio data first storage area R11 of the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 of the effect data memory 90123A. There is a period. For example, in a period from timing T04 to timing T08, loop playback of the music B-1 to be played is performed as shown in FIG. 68 (B3). In this period, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05 and in the period from timing T06 to timing T07, as shown in FIG. 68 (B4), the audio data first storage area R11 becomes the audio data read target area. . On the other hand, in the period from timing T05 to timing T06 and in the period from timing T07 to timing T08, as shown in FIG. 68 (B4), the audio data second storage area R12 is an audio data read target area. Even during the period after timing T08, the music B-1 as the BGM during the probability variation may be played back in a loop until the probability variation state ends or until the reach effect in the super reach is executed. Good.

  As described above, when the music B-1 that is the BGM being changed in the probability changing state is played back in a loop, the audio data read target area is provided in the voice data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A. The audio data is switched to the second storage area R12. The audio data second storage area R12 in the effect data memory 121 corresponds to a specific address range continuous from the final address of the audio data first storage area R11 in the ROM 90121. Therefore, if the start address MA09 + 1 and the end address MA1a of the music B-1 are designated, the CPU 90130 can read the audio data while updating (incrementing) the address as in the case of reproducing other music, and the music B- The audio data corresponding to 1 can be smoothly read out from both the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12, and the music B-1 can be reproduced.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58, at least a part of the effect data is included in the effect data used for the execution of effects by various effect devices by executing the effect data transfer process in the initial setting process in step S9056. However, it may be transferred from the ROM 90121 to the RAM 90122 or the work memory 90131, or may be transferred from the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C to the VRAM 90141 or the like. In this case, for example, control for transferring the image data read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B to the VRAM 90141 is started, and an initial operation by the movable members 9051 to 9054 or the like may be executed in parallel with this transfer. . As described above, by performing the initial operation of the movable member in parallel with the transfer of the predetermined production data, the production data can be efficiently transferred and the occurrence of delay can be suppressed.

  Alternatively, the first effect data used for the execution of the effect by the display device, such as the main image display device 905MA, for example, the effect by the display device such as the operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the sound output by the speakers 908L and 908R. It may be transferred with priority over the second effect data used for the execution of effects different from. In this case, in parallel with the transfer of the second effect data, the initial signal is supplied to the main image display device 905MA or the like using the already transferred first effect data. As a result, the production data is efficiently transferred, and the initial display by the display device such as the main image display device 905MA can be started within a short time after the power supply is started. Stable display can be suppressed.

  In the effect data transfer process, the transfer of the initial data for operation used for the initial display of the display device may be started after the transfer of the initial data for operation used for the initial operation of the movable member is started. Further, in the effect data transfer process, transfer of normal data for operation used for normal operation of the movable member may be started, and then transfer of normal data for display used for normal display of the display device may be started. Thus, for example, the effect data used to execute the effect by the second effect device, such as the movable members 9051 to 9054, can be obtained from the effect data used to execute the effect by the first effect device such as the main image display device 905MA. Is also given priority. Thereby, the production data is efficiently transferred, and for example, the initial operation by the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be started within a short time after the power supply is started, thereby suppressing the occurrence of delay.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58, in the initial setting process in step S9056, control for executing an initial operation by the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 may be performed. As such an initial operation, the movable members 9051 to 9054 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA from the retracted state as the second state that does not overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA. You may change to the advance state as a 1st state. Thereby, for example, by making the display area of the main image display device 905MA on which unstable display is performed difficult or impossible to visually recognize, the occurrence of delay can be suppressed while appropriately performing the initial operation.

  Alternatively, as an initial operation based on the control in the initial setting process, an effect device such as the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be operated with an initial operation pattern obtained by mixing a plurality of operation patterns. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 can be operated in a plurality of operation patterns in the notice effect or the reach effect.

  FIG. 69 shows a retracted state as an initial state in the upper mechanism 9050T including the movable members 9051 and 9052 and the decorative member 9057 in the effect movable mechanism 9050, and a plurality of operation patterns by the upper mechanism 9050T. The movable members 9051 and 9052 provided in the upper mechanism 9050T are pivotally supported by the decoration member 9057 and can be rotated, and the movable member 9051 and the movable member 9052 have different rotation ranges. That is, the movable member 9052 can be rotated between a retracted position and an advanced position with respect to the movable member 9051. The movable member 9051 has a configuration in which a base body is disposed behind a front surface portion provided with a plurality of light emitters, and holds the movable member 9052 between the front surface portion and the base body.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (A), when the upper mechanism 9050T is in the retracted state as the initial state, the longitudinal direction of the movable member 9051 is positioned on the upper side in a state along the substantially horizontal direction. In the operation pattern T1 shown in FIG. 69B, the movable member 9052 can be rotated without moving the decorative member 9057 and the movable member 9051 by the driving force of the operation motor 9060B shown in FIG. In the operation pattern T2 shown in FIG. 69 (C), the movable members 9051 and 9052 are rotated in an overlapped state with the downward movement of the decorative member 9057 by the driving force of the operation motor 9060A shown in FIG. it can. In the operation pattern T3 shown in FIG. 69D, the movable member 9051 is rotated by the driving force of the operating motor 9060A as the decorative member 9057 is moved downward, and the moving member 9052 is driven by the driving force of the operating motor 9060B. Can be rotated with respect to the movable member 9051, and the movable member 9052 can be advanced below the movable member 9051.

  FIG. 70 shows a retracted state as an initial state in the lower mechanism 9050B including the movable members 9053 and 9054 in the effect movable mechanism 9050, and a plurality of operation patterns by the lower mechanism 9050B. The movable members 9053 and 9054 provided in the lower mechanism 9050B are connected to the frame of the lower support unit via a predetermined link mechanism, and can move within a predetermined range by the power of the operation motor 9060C shown in FIG. The link mechanism includes, for example, link members 90642a and 90642b and link members 90645a and 90645b shown in FIG. One end of each of the link members 90645a and 90645b is pivotally supported by the frame, and the other end is pivotally supported near the lower end of the movable member 9054 to guide the movement of the movable member 9054.

  As shown in FIG. 70A, when the lower mechanism 9050B is in the retracted state as the initial state, each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 is located below, and the movable member 9053 is located behind the movable member 9054. Thus, the player can hardly visually recognize the movable member 9053. In the operation pattern B1 shown in FIG. 70B, the movable member 9053 moves upward from the back side of the movable member 9054 with a slight rotation by the driving force of the operation motor 9050C. In the operation pattern B2 shown in FIG. 70C, the movable member 9054 can be moved upward in accordance with the movement of the movable member 9053 by the further driving force of the operation motor 9050C.

  The initial operation pattern makes it possible to execute an initial operation in which the upper mechanism 9050T is continuously operated in the operation patterns T1 to T3 and an initial operation in which the lower mechanism 9050B is continuously operated in the operation patterns B1 and B2. The initial operation for operating the upper mechanism 9050T and the initial operation for operating the lower mechanism 9050B may be set such that the respective initial operations are executed in order and the execution periods do not overlap each other, or at least partially. It may be set such that each initial operation can be executed in parallel by overlapping the execution periods. Even when each initial operation is executed in order, the initial operation executed before the initial operation time elapses is an initial operation pattern obtained by mixing a plurality of operation patterns, and the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member. 9057 is operated. In addition, when the initial operations are executed in parallel, the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decoration are used in an initial operation pattern formed by mixing a plurality of operation patterns in a period in which the initial operation is executed in parallel. The member 9057 is operated.

  As described above, the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 are operated in an initial operation pattern formed by mixing a plurality of operation patterns. Thereby, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the effect device can be operated with a plurality of operation patterns corresponding to the effect accompanying the execution of the game, and the operation can be appropriately confirmed.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 may not have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and the part described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with the following structure.

  As a specific example, in the above-described embodiment, when it is determined in step S9057 shown in FIG. 58 that the relay unconnected flag is on, notification of the origin abnormality in step S9060 is not performed. In other words, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed, while the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. In some cases, control is performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable member. At the same time, if it is determined in step S9054 shown in FIG. 58 that there is no connection with the main board 9011, and if it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 61A that the relay unconnected flag is on, step S90206 is performed. It is controlled to display the checksum calculation contents and the like by the update display. That is, when both the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result can be displayed, while the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9016A are displayed. When either one of the substrates 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012 are not connected, control is performed so that the checksum calculation result is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the control whether or not the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed and the control whether or not the checksum calculation result can be displayed can be displayed. As long as it is configured to be able to be realized.

  Below, the modification regarding abnormality notification of a movable member is demonstrated first. In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S9057 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58 that the relay unconnected flag is on, the processes of steps S9058 and S9059 are not executed together with the process of step S9060. In the above description, the control is performed so that not only the abnormality notification of the movable member but also the confirmation of the origin position is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the relay unconnected flag is on, both steps S9058 and S9059 or only step S9058 may be executed. That is, when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are not connected, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be confirmed based on the position detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061. While determining whether or not the origin is abnormal, control may be performed so that the abnormality notification of the movable member is not performed when the origin abnormality occurs.

  Alternatively, even when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are in the unconnected state, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be performed, while the notification mode of the abnormality notification is the effect control board 9012 and the effect control. Compared to the notification mode of abnormality notification when the relay board 9016A is connected, the notification mode may be difficult to recognize. For example, when the abnormality notification of the movable member is performed by image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, the image display size is reduced, the image transparency is increased, and the image display is performed. What is necessary is just to be able to set it as the alerting | reporting aspect which cannot recognize abnormality alerting of a movable member by shortening a period, reducing the frequency | count of displaying an image, or the combination of these part or all. When a notification operation is performed using a plurality of effect devices, a notification mode in which it is difficult to recognize an abnormality notification of the movable member by reducing the number of effect devices used for the notification operation may be adopted. As described above, the range of the connection state of whether or not the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected is determined, and the limit of the abnormality notification that the abnormality notification of the movable member is not executed is determined, or What is necessary is just to set a limit to the abnormality notification of the movable member according to the connection state by determining the limit of the abnormality notification to be executed in a notification mode that is difficult to recognize.

  In the embodiment described above, in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58, the initial operation of the movable member can be executed in the initial setting process in step S9056 even when the relay unconnected flag is on. On the other hand, when the relay unconnected flag is on, it may be controlled not to execute the initial operation of the movable member. That is, when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are connected, the initial operation of the movable member can be executed, while the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are not connected. In such a case, it may be controlled not to perform the initial operation of the movable member.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control board 9012 are not directly connected to the effect control board 9012 and the harness HN1 (not via other boards), such as the effect control relay board 9016A. It has been described that the control is performed so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member in the connected state. On the other hand, for example, a board that is indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 via another board such as the effect control relay board 9016A, such as the drive control board 9016B, is not connected to the effect control board 9012. In such a case, control may be performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable member.

  In the above-described embodiment, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C that provide driving force for moving the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the movable member position sensor 9061 that detect the operation state of the movable members 9051 to 9054, etc. It has been described as being connected to the drive control board 9016B. On the other hand, it is good also as a structure which provided separately the board | substrate with which operation motor 9060A-9060C is connected, and the board | substrate with which movable member position sensor 9061 is connected. For example, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C may be connected to the drive control board 9016B, while the movable member position sensor 9061 may be connected to a sensor board different from the drive control board 9016B. In this case, different control may be performed on a plurality of boards that can be directly or indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 depending on the connection state. As an example, when the effect control board 9012 and the drive control board 9016A are connected directly or indirectly, but the effect control board 9012 and the sensor board are not connected, the initial operation of the movable member is performed. On the other hand, control may be performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable member. In addition, when the effect control board 9012 and the drive control board 9016A are not connected, but the effect control board 9012 and the sensor board are directly or indirectly connected, the initial operation of the movable member is performed. On the other hand, it may be controlled so as to notify the abnormality of the movable member while not executing.

  In the above embodiment, as a configuration for detecting the state of movable members such as the movable members 9051 to 9054, the position of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be detected using the movable member position sensor 9061. On the other hand, any state can be used as long as it can detect an arbitrary state in the movable member and can perform abnormality notification of the movable member based on the detection result. For example, a sensor that can directly or indirectly detect the speed, acceleration, movement amount, rotation amount, operation time, shape, temperature, or part or all of the movable members 9051 to 9054 at a predetermined position. What is necessary is just to set and enable the abnormality notification of the movable member based on the detection result. In addition, in a drive mechanism that supplies a driving force for changing (moving) the movable member such as the operation motors 9060A to 9060C together with the state of the movable member such as the movable members 9051 to 9054 or instead of the state of the movable member. An arbitrary state can be detected and abnormality notification can be executed based on the detection result. Instead of the operating motors 9060A to 9060C, the movable member may be changed (moved) by an arbitrary driving mechanism that supplies a driving force such as a solenoid. As described above, it may be possible to detect an arbitrary state in an arbitrary drive mechanism and perform abnormality notification based on the detection result.

  In the above embodiment, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like are confirmed in step S9058 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58, and if it is determined in step S9059 that there is an origin abnormality, the process proceeds to step S9060. It has been described as a notification that an origin abnormality has occurred. In addition to the abnormality notification in the initial setting of the movable member, or in place of the abnormality notification in the initial setting of the movable member, for example, the state of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is detected by the effect control process in step S9065 shown in FIG. Based on the result, abnormality notification of the movable member may be executable. With respect to the abnormality notification during the normal operation of the movable member, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed when the production control board 9012 and the production control relay board 9016A are connected, while the production control board 9012 and the production control. When the relay board 9016A for use is in an unconnected state, control may be performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable member.

  In the said embodiment, it demonstrated as what can perform abnormality alert | report about the movable member for effects like the movable members 9051-9054. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an abnormality notification may be executed for any movable member that can operate according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the wiring for driving the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 9028 for the special prize opening door shown in FIG. 39 may be connected to the main board 9011 via the solenoid relay board. Also, detection by a sensor for detecting the operating state of the movable wing piece provided in the normal variable winning ball device 906B and a sensor for detecting the operating state of the big winning door provided in the special variable winning ball device 907. A wiring for transmitting a signal may be connected to the main board 9011 via a solenoid relay board or a sensor relay board. In such a configuration, when the main board 9011 and the solenoid relay board or the sensor relay board are connected, it is possible to perform abnormality notification of the movable blade piece or the big prize door, while the main board 9011 and the solenoid relay board. Alternatively, when the sensor relay board is not connected, control may be performed so as not to notify abnormality of the movable blade piece or the big prize door. Alternatively, when the payout control board and the launch control board are connected, an abnormality notification of the launch motor can be performed, while when the payout control board and the launch control board are not connected, the launch motor is abnormal. You may control not to alert | report.

  Furthermore, the movable member is not limited to one that can perform abnormality notification, and may be one that can perform abnormality notification for any circuit, device, or other element. It is not limited to abnormality notification, and any output may be possible.

  In the embodiment described above, the presence / absence of abnormality notification is changed according to the connection state between a plurality of substrates such as the connection state between the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the presence / absence of abnormality notification may be changed according to the connection state in an arbitrary circuit, apparatus, or other element provided within or outside the single substrate. That is, in the configuration in which the first connection part and the second connection part that can be connected to each other are provided, when the first connection part and the second connection part are connected, any abnormality notification can be performed. If the first connection unit and the second connection unit are in an unconnected state, any control may be performed so that abnormality notification is not performed. It is not limited to abnormality notification, and any output is possible when the first connection part and the second connection part are connected in the configuration in which the first connection part and the second connection part that can be connected to each other are provided. On the other hand, when the first connection unit and the second connection unit are not connected, control may be performed so that no output is performed. Further, the unconnected state between the substrates and the unconnected state between the connection portions may include a state in which at least a part of wiring is connected and another part of the wiring is not connected. .

  Next, a modified example in the case of displaying the checksum calculation result and the like will be described. In the above embodiment, if it is determined in step S9054 shown in FIG. 58 that there is no connection with the main board 9011, a memory inspection process is executed in step S9055, and in step S90205 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the relay unconnected flag is off, the process of step S90206 is not executed, so that the control result such as the checksum calculation result is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is determined that there is no connection with the main board 9011 in step S9054 shown in FIG. 58, if the relay unconnected flag is off, the memory inspection process in step S9055 is executed. It may not be done. In other words, even when the effect control board 9012 and the main board 9011 are not connected, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, they are stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. It may be controlled so that the checksum calculation itself using the effect data is not executed, and the calculation result is not displayed accordingly. In step S9054 shown in FIG. 58, it is determined whether or not the relay unconnected flag is on. If it is determined that the relay unconnected flag is on, the memory inspection process in step S9055 may be executed. In this case, it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 61A whether or not there is a connection with the main board 9011. If it is determined that there is no connection, the checksum calculation result and the like are determined in step S90206. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a connection, it may be controlled not to display the checksum calculation result or the like by not executing the process of step S90206. As described above, when one of the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result is not executed by not executing the process of calculating the checksum itself. May be controlled so as not to be displayed, or the processing for calculating the checksum may be executed but the checksum calculation result may not be displayed.

  Alternatively, the checksum calculation result and the like can be displayed even when one of the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected. The display form may be less recognizable than the display form in the case where both the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected. For example, when displaying the checksum calculation result by displaying the image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, reducing the display size of the image, increasing the transparency of the image, It suffices if the display period can be displayed in a display mode that makes it difficult to recognize the checksum calculation result by reducing the display period, reducing the number of times the image is displayed, or by combining some or all of them. As described above, both the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, or one of the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are provided. By defining the connection status range of whether it is in an unconnected state, by defining the limit of display that does not display the checksum calculation result, or by defining the display limit of displaying in a display mode that is difficult to recognize, What is necessary is just to provide a display restriction according to the connection state.

  In the above embodiment, the main board 9011 is indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015, while the effect control relay board 9016A is directly connected via the harness HN1 (via another board). It was described as being connected to the effect control board 9012. In contrast, for example, a plurality of boards indirectly connected to the presentation control board 9012 via another board such as the presentation control relay board 9016A, such as the drive control board 9016B, and the presentation control board 9012. Checksum calculation results and the like can be displayed when they are not connected, and checksum calculation results and the like are not displayed when some of them and the effect control board 9012 are not connected. You may control to. Alternatively, for a plurality of boards that can be directly connected to the effect control board 9012, when all of them and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result can be displayed, and one of them can be displayed. When the display unit and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, it may be controlled not to display a checksum calculation result or the like.

  In the above embodiment, as a determination process for determining whether or not the effect data stored in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is normal, step S90204 in the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. In the above description, the checksum is calculated and the calculation result can be displayed. On the other hand, the data determination method is not limited to the checksum calculation, and any determination method may be employed. The checksum calculation is not limited to calculating an exclusive OR for each address data, but may be an exclusive OR calculation using data at a plurality of addresses as an operation unit.

  In the embodiment described above, the check sum of the stored data is calculated for all of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the calculation result can be displayed. On the other hand, the checksum of the stored data may be calculated for a part of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the calculation result may be displayed. Whether or not a checksum is to be calculated may be varied depending on the contents stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, for the effect control program and various management data stored in the first storage area of the ROM 90121, and the image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B, the calculation results and the like are used as checksum calculation objects. On the other hand, the audio data stored in the second storage area of the ROM 90121, the audio data other than the image data stored in the effect data memory 90123A, the motor data and the light emission data stored in the effect data memory 90123C are displayed. The checksum may not be calculated, and the calculation result may not be displayed. Depending on the condition of establishment of predetermined calculation conditions, the setting of which stored data is used to calculate the checksum may be varied. For example, when the power is turned on while the push button 9031B is pressed, the checksum is calculated using the data stored in the ROM 90121 and the calculation result can be displayed, while the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are displayed. The checksum calculation using the stored data may not be performed.

  In the above-described embodiment, whether or not the storage data is normal for storage devices such as the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C that are mounted on the effect control board 9012 and can store effect data used for effect execution. In the above description, it is possible to display the determination result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage device capable of storing control data used for arbitrary control in the pachinko gaming machine 901 can display a determination result as to whether or not the stored data is normal. May be. For example, whether or not the stored data is normal for the ROM 90101 that is mounted on the main board 9011 and can store control data (including binary codes constituting a program module) used for controlling the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 Such a determination result may be displayed. In this case, for example, a plurality of substrates that can be connected to the main substrate 9011, such as a payout control substrate and an information terminal substrate, may be set in advance as the second substrate and the third substrate. Then, when both the second substrate and the second substrate are not connected to the main substrate 9011, the determination result of the stored data such as the checksum calculation result using the stored data of the ROM 90101 is displayed as the main image display device 905MA. Display is possible with a display device such as, and when either one of the second substrate and the third substrate is not connected to the main substrate 9011, control is performed so that the determination result of the stored data is not displayed. Also good. Further, the present invention is not limited to determining whether the storage data of the non-volatile recording medium such as the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is normal, and for example, a volatile recording medium such as the RAM 90122 or the work memory 90131. It may be determined whether the stored data is normal and the determination result can be displayed.

  In the above embodiment, the checksum calculation result that is the determination result of the stored data according to the connection state between the plurality of boards such as the connection board between the production control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the production control board 9012. It was explained as something that changes whether or not to display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, whether or not the determination result of the stored data is displayed depends on the connection state in an arbitrary circuit, device, or other element provided within or outside the single substrate. It may be a thing. That is, in the configuration in which the second connection portion and the third connection portion connectable to the first connection portion are provided, both the second connection portion and the third connection portion and the first connection portion are in an unconnected state. The determination result by the determination process using the stored data can be displayed, and the stored data is used when either the second connection unit or the third connection unit and the first connection unit are in an unconnected state. You may control not to display the determination result by determination processing. The second connection unit and the third connection unit are not limited to the display of the determination result by the determination process using the stored data, and in the configuration in which the second connection unit and the third connection unit connectable to the first connection unit are provided. When both of the first connection unit and the first connection unit are in an unconnected state, any processing result using arbitrary data can be output, and either the second connection unit or the third connection unit and the first connection unit May be controlled so as not to output an arbitrary processing result using arbitrary data.

  In addition, various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the configuration for confirming the connection state uses a voltage at a connection confirmation terminal such as the terminals TM22 and TN22 shown in FIGS. 59A and 59B, or determines whether or not a command is received. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, a configuration in which a connection state can be confirmed mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically using a switch or a sensor may be used.

  In the above embodiment, in the process of step S90102 shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is to be a special gaming state such as a probability changing state, and based on the determination to be the probability changing state. In the above description, it is assumed that the probability variation control condition is satisfied and the control is performed in the probability variation state after the big hit gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the fact that a game ball that has won (entered) a prize winning opening (second prize winning opening) in a probability changing attacker provided at a predetermined position in the game area has been detected by the probability changing detection switch. The probability change control condition may be satisfied, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state may be controlled to the probability changing state. The winning prize opening (second winning prize opening) of the probability variation attacker can change from a closed state to an open state when the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state is a predetermined number of times (for example, “16”). When the number of times of execution of the game is other than the predetermined number, it may not be possible to change to the open state in the closed state. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific area in the attacker that is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the game area. It may be constituted so that.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 may be one that does not perform variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. As an example, the variable winning device provided in the game area is released from the closed state (second state) based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the start winning opening provided in the game area. When the game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters the specific area (V winning opening) of the plurality of areas, it is controlled to a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It may be a thing. In such a pachinko gaming machine 901, whether or not abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed by performing the effect control main process as shown in FIG. 58 and the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. 61 (A). It may be configured so that at least one of the control of whether or not and the control of whether or not the checksum calculation result can be displayed can be realized.

  The above form can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to a slot machine or the like. The slot machine is an arbitrary gaming machine that can perform a predetermined game such as variable display of symbols as a plurality of types of identification information, and can give a predetermined game value based on the game result, more specifically, A variable display device that can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets (the number of medals or credits) for one game and variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified One game is completed by displaying and displaying a display result (for example, a plurality of reels, etc.), and a prize (for example, a cherry prize, a watermelon prize, a bell prize, a replay prize, a BB prize, an RB prize, etc.) is selected according to the display result. ) Can be generated. In such a slot machine, the pachinko gaming machine 901 described in the above embodiment has the feature that hardware resources including the image display device of the slot machine cooperate with software that performs predetermined processing. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that all or one part may be provided. That is, in the slot machine, whether or not the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed by performing the effect control main process as shown in FIG. 58 and the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. Of the control and the control of whether or not the checksum calculation result can be displayed, at least one of them may be realized.

  In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the sound output operation in the speaker, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the decoration LED Various rendering operations including the lighting operation can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout-type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 or a slot machine, for example. Instead of this, a form distributed by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device may be adopted. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  As described above, in the above embodiment, for example, when it is determined in step S9057 shown in FIG. 58 that the relay unconnected flag is on, the origin abnormality notification in step S9060 is not performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9057 that the relay unconnected flag is OFF, the origin abnormality notification in step S9060 can be executed. In this way, when the first board such as the effect control board 9012 and the second board such as the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the control is performed so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the abnormality notification from being frequently executed in the manufacturing stage and the development stage, and to improve the work efficiency.

  Connectors CN01 and CN11 shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B) include terminals TM22 and TN22, which are connection confirmation terminals, respectively. In step S9052 shown in FIG. 58 and the like, based on the voltage at these connection confirmation terminals. Check the connection status. Thereby, a connection state can be confirmed with a simple configuration.

  In the above embodiment, for example, when it is determined in step S9054 shown in FIG. 58 that there is no connection with the main board 9011, and it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 61A that the relay unconnected flag is on. In addition, the check sum calculation contents and the like are displayed by the update display in step S90206. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9054 that there is a connection with the main board 9011, or if it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 61A that the relay unconnected flag is off, step S90206. The update display is not performed, and the control content of the checksum is not displayed. Thus, in the configuration including the first board such as the effect control board 9012 and the second and third boards such as the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011, either the second board or the third board is provided. When one side and the first substrate are not connected, the output for inspection can be appropriately suppressed by controlling not to display the determination result by the determination process such as the checksum calculation result. As a result, for example, one of the second board and the third board and the first board are accidentally disconnected (temporarily disconnected from the cable) while being installed in an amusement store, and the power is turned on. In the situation, the display of the determination result by the determination process such as the checksum calculation result is not performed, so that it is possible to suppress the erroneous recognition of the failure at the game shop side.

  Furthermore, for example, voice data used for voice control is stored in a ROM 90121 as shown in FIG. 41 (A), and image data used for display control and the like is stored in an effect data memory 90123A as shown in FIG. 41 (B1). When stored, the audio data is also stored in the storage area corresponding to the specific address range of the effect data memory 90123A continuous from the last address of the ROM 90121. Thus, by storing the first control data such as voice data in the area corresponding to the specific address range of the second area that is continuous from the final address of the first area, the storage area can be effectively used to reduce the manufacturing cost. In addition to the reduction, the control data can be read smoothly and appropriate control can be performed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, This is a concept including a ratio that is different in a relationship of A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Game board 3 Frame for game machines 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5HL First hold display unit 5HR Second hold display unit 6A Normal winning ball device 6B Normal variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning game Ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Audio control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start switch 23 Count switch 100 Game control micro Computer 101, 121 ROM
102, 122 RAM
103 CPU
104, 124 Random number circuit 105, 125 I / O
120 CPU for effect control
123 Display control unit AHA Active display area AHW Active display frame H1 to H4 Reserved display 901 Pachinko machine 905MA Main image display device 905SU Sub image display device 908L, 908R Speaker 909a Top frame LED
909b Left frame LED
909c Right frame LED
9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9016A Production control relay board 9016B Drive control board 9016C to 9016F Light emitter control board 9051 to 9054 Movable member 9060A to 9060C Operation motor 9061 Movable member position sensor 9071 to 9074 Light emitter unit 90120 For effect control Microcomputer 90121 ROM
90123A-90123C Production data memory 90130 CPU
90140 VDP
90411, 90413a to 90413c Light emitter driver 90411 Motor drive driver CN01, CN11 connector TM01 to TM24, TN01 to TN24 terminals

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Corresponding display means capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display by any of a plurality of display modes having different expectations.
Notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect that continuously notifies over a predetermined period that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level;
A suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level;
Control means for controlling electrical components;
Output means for outputting a specific signal for driving an electrical component in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means,
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means, a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner, and a waveform rises in a mode that changes more slowly than the first output state. The output state can be set to any one of the second output states,
The other output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means,
The output means is set to the second output state;
The suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate when the notification effect is being executed than when the notification effect is not being executed. A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Corresponding display means capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display by any of a plurality of display modes having different expectations.
Notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect that continuously notifies over a predetermined period that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level;
A suggestion effect executing means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the corresponding display changes to a display mode with a higher expectation level;
Control means for controlling electrical components;
Output means for outputting a specific signal for driving an electrical component in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means,
The output means outputs an output state when the input control signal is output to another output means, a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner, and a waveform rises in a mode that changes more slowly than the first output state. The output state can be set to any one of the second output states,
The other output means is provided on the other board connected via the wiring member to the board on which the output means is provided,
The output means is set to the first output state;
The suggestion effect executing means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate when the notification effect is being executed than when the notification effect is not being executed.